4.1 BlokSeT Evo Catalogue - Optimum - JYT1653300

BlokSeT
Low voltage switchboard

Master catalogue 2023
se.com
Table of content
Introduction 1-36 1
Description and characteristics 2-1

2
Power Control Center

Electrical distribution > 630 A 3-1 3

4
Electrical distribution < 630 A 4-2
Power Control Center 5-1

5

and Motor Control Center 6-1
6
Motor Control Center 7-1

7
BlokSeT IPMCC 8-1

8
Variable speed drives and soft starters 9-1

9
Enclosures 10-2
10
Busbars 11-1
11
BlokSeT specific adaptations 12-1

12
Technical information 13-1

13
BLK000000E 3
4 BLK000000E
Introduction
My Personalized Experience 1-33
EcoStruxure Power Build 1-35

Large site switchboard software 1-35
Technical transfer file 1-37
Panorama 1-40
Equipments & Systems solutions 1-40
BlokSeT configurations 1-42
Withdrawability of functional units 1-43
Very high power incomer / feeder 1-44

MasterPact MTZ3 / NW 1-44
High power incomer / feeder 1-45

MasterPact MTZ2 / NW / NS 4000 A 1-45
MasterPact MTZ1/2 / NW/NT
ComPacT NS 1-46
Feeders 1-47
ComPacT NSX / NSXm /GV 1-47
ComPacT NSX 1-48
Drawers 1-49
High power incomer / feeder 1-50

MW2 Mix with MTZ1/NT and MTZ2/
NW 1-50
Variable speed drive

and soft starting 1-51
Power factor correction and harmonic filtering 1-53
Power factor correction 1-55
Double Front Solution 1-56
BLK011800E 1-1
More than
700,000
cubicles installed
BlokSeT LV switchboards
are trusted by customers
worldwide
1-2
Switchboard solution
Enhanced safety and Greater reliability,

reliability within your reach flexibility, Benefits at a glance
Embodying decades of expertise, and intelligence • High quality design for
BlokSeT solutions are engineered BlokSeT solutions combine superior safety and
to be complete and personalized industry-leading features performance
low voltage switchboards for power • Improved continuity of
and designs with Schneider supply, even in severe
distribution and motor control. Electric™ support to make environments
BlokSeT switchboards answer the implementation and operation • Smart solutions for energy
need for superior operational safety quicker and more reliable savings and optimized
in today’s high performance LV so that you can lower costs operation
power applications. Versatile and and realize a faster return • Pre-engineered modular
architecture for easy
durable, BlokSeT switchboards have on your investment. A fully implementation
the comprehensive capabilities and functional switchboard with • Quick return on investment
intelligence you need to keep your built-in intelligence for energy • Localized support and
business competitive. efficiency, BlokSeT is a simple services for ease of
and modular solution. It is easy ownership
to choose, intuitive to use, cost
effective and simple to install
and upgrade.
1-3
Superior electrical safety for personnel
Type-tested for high

electrical installation and
operational safety
With IEC 61439-1&2 and full type-
testing by independent ASEFA,
LOVAG and ASTA certified
laboratories, you can have the peace-
of-mind that safety is engineered into
every BlokSeT switchboard.
With BlokSeT, protection

is never left to chance
Improved safety measures
From conception through design,
installation and everyday operation, • Forms of internal separation up to 4b
• Embedded interlock systems to prevent
you can count on our commitment on-load disconnection
to maximize safety. • Safe live-part protection up to IP xxB
Withdrawable drawers have three • Fully insulated bus bars (optional)
safe interlocked positions: connected, • Padlockable with three different locks
test, and disconnected, plus drawer • Protection with optional doors and
accessories
stop, to improve operator safety when
connecting and testing.
Smart engineering
and user-friendly operation
· Built-in intelligence for energy High internal arc withstand
efficiency and continuity of service
• Fully type-tested in compliance with
· Smart grid-ready for enhanced IEC 61641 (internal arc) to increase
control and monitoring safety for personnel and equipment
• Internal arc containment up to 100 kA /
· ComPacT footprint allowing more 0.4 s
equipment and functions • Maximized operator protection at three
levels:
· Withdrawable functional units for - Horizontal and vertical busbars
high availability and continuous - Functional units, including
processes withdrawable drawers
- Outgoing cable connections
· Fixed functional units for economical
applications
Tested and certified by

independent ASEFA,
ASTA and Dekra labs.
1-4
Total electrical safety for personnel Industry-leading live part protection, plus drawer stopper
Three safe interlocked drawer positions With BlokSeT, protection is never left to chance
Test position Disconnected position
1-5
Superior reliability and high performance
Outstanding safety
and personalized solutions
for diverse applications
Trusted worldwide for diverse industrial and
infrastructural applications, BlokSeT solutions
are personalized to fully satisfy different
performance and harsh environmental
requirements.
Schneider Electric inside:

quality and compatibility
A robust architecture,type-tested, standardized
modules devices work together to improve Mining, metals and minerals industry
functionality, safety, continuity of supply and
installation reliability even in the most difficult
conditions.
·A
ll components and accessories are designed
by Schneider Electric and manufactured to
rigorous quality standards
·C
ompatibility between switchboards, functional
units, and built-in devices is tested and
validated
·S
chneider Electric components have
outstanding electrical and mechanical
consistency and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC)
Subway and railway systems
Durability in difficult environments

·A
nti-corrosion: surface treatments on metallic
sheets against corrosion and salt-spray
·T
in or nickel busbar coating on copper
conductive parts for H2S and SO2 atmosphere
withstand
·2
G version for seismic or high vibration
environment
1-6
Water and wastewater industry Petrochemicals
Airport Data centres
Healthcare facilities Commercial buildings
Outstanding safety and customized solu-

tions for any applications and severe en-
vironments
1-7
High performance and superior efficiency
Industry-leading capabilities
· Maximum busbar rating up to 7000 A
· Maximum rating of PCC, up to 6300 A
· Maximum rating of MCC, up to 250 kW
· Smart communicating devices for connected switchboards
· ComPacT design for higher stacking density and optimized
footprint
· Safe upgrading of energized equipment
A disconnectable design for power

distribution
The high-security power distribution switchboard offers
maximum reinforced electrical isolation.
Power distribution
Power Control Centre (PCC) including protection
and power factor correction:
· Incomers up to 6300 A (MasterPact circuit breakers)
· Feeders up to 6300 A (MasterPact circuit breakers)
and 630 A (ComPacT circuit breakers)
·P
ower factor correction up to 646 kVAR
A flexible, withdrawable design for motor

control
and power distribution
ComPacT and powerful switchboards answer the needs of
the most demanding motor control and power distribution
applications. BlokSeT combines outstanding continuity of
supply and safety with a long, reliable service.
Motor control
Motor Control Centre (MCC) including protection,
starters, and drives:
· Conventional starters up to 250 kW
· Soft starters up to 250 kW
· Drives up to 160 kW
1-8
For electrical distribution up to 7000 A,
incomer and feeder up to 6300 A,
and motor control up to 250 kW
1-9
Improved versatility and flexibility
Fast, stress-free installation, upgrading, and maintenance
Single front or double front access thanks to back-to-back configuration, top or
bottom direct power connections, rear
or side power connections for easy
installation. Plus, standardized dimensions
and an optimized footprint save time and money during installation.
· Fixed, disconnectable or withdrawable functional units
· Withdrawable drawers size optimization:
full and half-widths, different heights from 100 to 600 mm
· Direct power plug connection to the vertical busbar (50 mm pitch)
· Three safe positions:
connected, test, and disconnected
eliable drawer position indicators on
·R
front faces, and drawer stop
·H
orizontal and vertical busbars (flat copper and Linergy) for power distribution
·W
ithdrawable MasterPact and plug-in
ComPacT circuit breaker modules
·C
urrent transformers inside
Upgrade BlokSeT while under load with high level of safety

·E
asily modify and upgrade your BlokSeT solution and add new functions as
your needs change: scalability while under load, equipping of additional slots in
reserved spaces, association of cubicles, fast interchangeability without special
tools
·D
egree of protection up to IPxxD on busbar and connections on busbar by
plug-in clamps
·C
ustomer connection separate from the functional unit (form up to 4b)
Smart devices to improve productivity and energy efficiency
As standalone devices or fully integrated solutions, each plug-and-play energy monitoring, motor
control, and power factor correction solution within BlokSeT switchboards offers advanced technology.
Power circuit
protection and control Motor motion control
MasterPact MTZ1,2,3/NT and Altivar ATV630, ATV930, Coupler control
NW, ATV320, Altistart ATS480 Sepam
ComPacT NS, NSX and NSXm
Motor protection
and monitoring Process automation Energy and power
TeSysTM T, TeSys U, TeSys D Quantum, Premium, quality metering
M340 and M580 PowerLogic PM 800
24/7 visibility of energy use and power quality
1-10
Double front access and optimized footprint Power distribution with Linergy busbar
Fixed, disconnectable or withdrawable functional units Withdrawable MasterPact and plug-in Com-
PacT circuit breakers
Drawer size optimization Direct connection to the vertical busbar (IPxxD)
Schneider Electric devices inside
1-11
iPMCC by BlokSeT:
Smart panel - Built-in intelligence for efficient control and monitoring
Greater efficiency and enhanced productivity

iPMCC (intelligent Power and Motor Control Centre) is a highly capable and
advanced smart solution for fault prevention, protection, and automatic restart.
It helps improve energy efficiency and reduce downtime for continuous and
critical processes.
Optimize motor performance

· Motor monitoring and protection with failure activities in accordance
with IEC/EN 60947-4-1
· Motor and protection device configuration accessible at all times
· Associated with TeSys T, iPMCC enables the detection of faults like no-
load running, shaft bearing seizure, abnormal starting or heating, pump
cavitations,
and pulsating torque
Enhance control and monitoring

· Easy access to real-time information
· Improve traceability and control
· Local or remote real-time information access
· Motor operating status and time monitoring (alarms and tripping)
· Parameter monitoring and management of status, measurements, diagnostics,
trends, and energy consumption
Boost smart-grid integration

· Reliable, highly dependable, and pre-tested communication architectures
offering leading industry protocols engineered to optimize asset energy
efficiency (Ethernet TCP/IP, Ethernet/IP, Profibus-DP, DeviceNet, Modbus,
CANopen, etc.)
· Seamless integration with energy management and control systems
(EMCS),and process automation management systems (DCS)
· Complete range of design assistance tools
Di
mo
Greater reliability, superior efficiency,

and enhanced productivity
1-12
iscover the iPMCC by BlokSeT DS: our best-in-class digital solution for power distribution,
otor control, and power factor correction.
1-13
A complete range for diverse applications
For power distribution and motor control including variable speed

drives, motor starters, power factor correction and harmonic filtering.
PCC(1)
D
High-power incomers and feeders up to 6300 A
Withdrawable, disconnectable, fixed
MCC / PCC
Mw2
Power and Motor feeders
Withdrawable
MCC(2)
Mf
Motor feeders
Fixed
Ms
MCC
Variable speed drives and soft starters

Fixed/ Withdrawable
PFC(3)
Dc
Capacitors/ Harmonic Filters
Fixed
(1) PCC = Power Control Centre

(2) MCC = Motor Control Centre
(3) PFC = Power Factor Correction and harmonic filtering
1-14
BlokSeT switchboard specifications
GENERAL DATA
Standards IEC 61439-1/-2, IEC 61921, IEC TR 61641, IEC 60529, IEC 60068-2-11,
IEC 60721-3-3 & IEC 61000-x-x
Certificate Certified by recognized certification bodies ASEFA, ASTA, Dekra, and
tested by independent laboratories
ELECTRICAL DATA
Rated insulation voltae Ui 1000 V 3~
Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V 3~
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Up to 12 kV
Overvoltage category Up to IV
Degree of pollution 3
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Main Busbar:
Rated current Ie Up to 7000A
Rated peak withstand current Ipk Up to 220 kA
Rated short-time withstand current Icw Up to 100 kA rms - 1s(1)
Distribution busbar:
Rated current Ie Up to 3200A
Rated peak withstand current Ipk Up to 220 kA
Rated short-time withstand current Icw Up to 100 kA rms - 1s(2)
Arc fault containment
Prospective short-circuit current up to 100 kA
Duration 0.4 s
Criteria (IEC TR 61641) 1 to 7
Earthing system TT-IT-TNS-TNC
MECHANICAL DATA
Form of separation Up to Form 4b
Withdrawability FFF/WWW
Seismic UBC 97, IBC 2006 / AC 156 (site class B-C-D, floor level only),
IEC 68-3-3 (equivalent to Richter scale up to level 9) / IEEE 693,
GOST 17516.1-90 (civil market, all seismic intensity, up to installation
level 2)
2G, zone 4
Installation Indoor- environment type 2, EMC – Type A as per IEC61439-1
Degree of protection Up to IP54
Operating temperature - 5 °C to 50 °C
Vibration IACS E10
0.7G
Corrosive atmosphere H2S and SO2 (IEC 60721-3-3)
Up to 3C2
1) For Main Busbar Icw=150 kA rms - 1S and 86 kA rms -3s contact Schneider Electric
2) For VBB Icw=65 kA rms - 3s contact Schneider Electric
Green Premium TM equipment

· Compliance and transparency - Design for complying with environment regulation and achieving superior sustainable performance
· Well-being performance - Design for eliminating hazardous material and environmental risks
esource performance - Design for reducing energy consumption and carbon footprint
·R
1-15
. Circular performance - Design for optimizing total cost of ownership of assets
BlokSeT
1-16
Well-being and Circularity
Superior environmental performance with Green Premium
The BlokSeT is RoHS and REACh compliant

• Transparent environment information
• Product Environment Profile, compliant with ISO14025
• Circular instructions
Sustainable packaging
• Complying with sustainable packaging guideline, wood pallet is certified as FSC 100% from DC
Resource
Legal compliance
• Ensure full regulation compliance about substances and chemical components
Well-Being
Upgradeability & Recyclability

• The function of equipment can be improved when the devices installed in enclosure are updated
• Recycling rate: 94%
Circular
1-17
Whatever your process...
Oil & gas, petrochemicals, mining, metals, minerals,
water and wastewater treatment, food & beverage,
pharmaceuticals, microelectronics, airports...
Our iPMCC solutions adapt to the specific requirements
of your continuous and critical process.
1-18
intelligent Power & Motor Control Centre - iPMCC
Improve the dependability

of your production tool
with reinforced safety...
> In today’s highly competitive markets, you need to maximise production time by ensuring the reliability of your installation through increased
dependability: continuity of service, safety of personnel and assets, maintainability and upgradability.
> Designed to provide safe LV electrical distribution as well as optimise the performance of your motors and loads, our iPMCC solutions will help
you achieve your goal.
...manage lead times and

reduce costs...
> You are faced with the challenge of keeping lead times and risks under control and reducing costs throughout the entire lifecycle of your
installations.
> iPMCC solutions include effective and innovative tools to help you design and implement safe, scalable systems quickly and flexibly.
...particularly your
electrical energy costs
> Electrical energy represents a major proportion of your production costs.
It is therefore essential to reduce your electrical energy consumption, not only in the face of rising energy prices but also to meet your
commitments to sustainable development and environmental protection.
> With its iPMCC range of solutions, the global specialist in energy management can help you reduce your energy consumption and allocate
your electricity consumption costs per motor application.
1-19
Intelligent solutions for
fast and easy access to
information from anywhere,
around the clock
Our iPMCC solutions for continuous and critical processes were developed through our specific expertise in energy and
industrial process control management. Forming the keystone of the energy efficiency of your installations, facilities or
process units, they incorporate a range of functions to supply power (intelligent Power Control Centre - iPCC), start up,
control, protect and monitor your LV network electric motors and loads (intelligent Motor Control Centre - iMCC). The
breadth of the range ensures that all types of continuous and critical process as well as specific requirements are covered.
1
1 Remote control and
monitoring of your installation
A continuous, real-time communication
interface with your control and monitoring
systems for energy management and
process control.
> iPMCC solutions communicate with the major
iPMCC solutions allow the
industrial local area networks on the market
use of monitoring means
(Ethernet TCP/IP, Ethernet/IP, Profibus-DP,
to optimize the energy
DeviceNet, Modbus, etc.).
efficiency of your assets, > With data delivered in real time, your operational
offering following benefits: and maintenance staff will have immediate access
Dependability, to the relevant information to control your motors
even in severe industrial and electrical distribution locally or remotely.
environments
Safety of personnel
and assets, maintainability
and upgradability
Lead time management
and risk as well as cost 2 Information for local operation,
reduction throughout maintenance and upgrading
your installation's entire of your installation
lifecycle
Information on electrical distribution, motor
operation and power consumption can be
accessed.
> iPMCC solutions can integrate a dedicated human-

machine interface (HMI) or communicate via a personal
computer directly on the motor starters.
1-20
intelligent Power & Motor Control Centre - iPMCC
3 Information for site engineering

With information delivered to ensure the traceability of electrical
distribution, motor operation and power consumption data,
installations are constantly improved.
> iPMCC solutions make it easy to collect all the statistics you need
to develop effective plans covering the operation, maintenance,
optimisation and upgrading of your installations, as well as energy
efficiency.
iPMCC solutions
integrate perfectly
into your site network
infrastructure,
whatever the
communication
protocol, but also into
energy management
control systems
and process
control systems.
2
Example of a iPMCC
solution integrated into
a site infrastructure
1-21
You want to maximise production time by reducing your installation downtimes.
Designed to optimise the performance of your motors by preventing malfunctions and reducing shutdown time, iPMCC can significantly improve
the safety and dependability of your installations throughout their lifecycle.
Provide safe and dependable

electrical energy in your
process units
> Our iPMCC solutions are built around highly
dependable functional switchboards for the LV
electrical distribution. Their reliability is reinforced
by the outstanding electrical and mechanical
consistency and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) of all the Schneider Electric components.
> Developed and tested in accordance with
IEC 61439, they deliver a high level of reliability
and dependability. Optimise the operational
> In addition to a modular design with fully performance of your motors
withdrawable (WWW-type) motor starters, and loads
the switchboards can be reconfigured without
shutting down power.w > One of the key functions of our BlokSeT
range with iPMCC solutions is motor control and
protection, offering an appropriate behaviour in
the event of failure in accordance with IEC/EN
60947-4-1.
> They include communicating electronic relays
using the highest precision motor protection
models available on the market.
> All the information required for controlling,
optimising and monitoring your process can be
accessed at any time, locally or remotely. You
can:
- set parameters and activate protection devices
- configure and control the motor commands
- monitor the operating times and status of the
motors (alarms and trips)
- exchange data (states, measurements,
diagnostics, logs, counters).
> Our technology provides type 2 coordination
for protection devices and total coordination up
to 15 kW.
IEC 61439-1&2
Our solutions are built around tested, compliant
LV switchboards
1-22
The safety of your personnel and assets is one of your top priorities.
iPMCC solutions actively help to secure and optimise the operation and maintenance of your
electrical equipment.
Operate, maintain and upgrade

with reinforced safety while
energised
> BlokSeT switchboards have Test position
feature so that the drawers can be handled
safely. All the energised parts are protected by
IP20 screens.
> Functions can be tested and simulated in real
situations without any risk to operators, motors
or their environment thanks to a range of safety
devices that prevent handling when under load:
- visible power disconnection
- mechanical indication of circuit breaker position
- continuity of service of other equipment
supplied by auxiliary voltage
- pre-tripping system
- mechanical and electrical interlocking system
- electrical switching system.
> The ergonomic design of the switchboards
Reinforce your installation simplifies operation. The operator interfaces
through safe equipment on the front face display the measured values
and data relating to load status. They provide
> Our iPMCC solutions are safe. local and remote access to the protection relay
They incorporate best-in-class safety systems in configuration functions.
the functional LV swithboards in accordance with An integrated communication bus can be used
IEC 61439: to connect to a personal computer.
- prevention of internal arcing and confinement at
> During operation, maintenance and upgrading,
three levels
your teams can work on the system without
- high short-circuit current withstand.
having to cut the power:
> BlokSeT Switchboards offer different levels - programming and configuring protection relays,
of protection (IP31/IP42/IP54) to match locally or remotely
your installation's specific environmental - modifying the configuration of the switchboard
characteristics. (adding, modifying or removing motor starters).
Improved safety
even in test position
1-23
To maintain a competitive edge, you need to reduce commissioning times and cut operating and maintenance costs.
iPMCC solutions help you optimise your overall cost of ownership and save energy.
Reduce lead times and costs Reduce electrical energy

throughout the entire lifecycle consumption and allocate costs
> iPMCC solutions can help you save time at
per motor application
different stages of the process: > iPMCC solutions will have an immediate and
- Engineering with pre-designed solutions and a measurable impact on your electrical energy
whole range of design assistance tools consumption. They include variable speed
- Wiring with fieldbus and easy connectors to drives and soft starters that adapt to the motor
minimize mistakes. production and load requirements to reduce load
- Installation with downloadable parameters peaks by 50% or more.
- Commissioning with diagnostic functions and
> Variable speed drives and soft starters can be
statistics to identify faults and errors
24/7
combined with capacitors to manage reactive
> iPMCC solutions also help you to reduce costs power factor correction and thermal withstand to:
related to: - eliminate reactive power-related costs
- Energy consumption. with all the information - reduce subscribed demand while increasing
collected, IPMCC allows to set up an adapted energy availability visibility over
strategy for energy efficiency improvement - improve power quality and increase the service your energy use
- Operation Real time analysis of all the states and life of devices connected to the supply network. and quality
parameters of the electrical distribution, including failure or
> Other devices also help to optimise energy
deviation from normal operating conditions.
usage and consumption.
With iPMCC solutions the right people are notified quickly
The motor protection relays with functions for
in case of an unplanned outage or event. They are, at
controlling, managing and monitoring parameters
any time able to view alarms & events using filtering and
(voltage, current, power and energy) allows you
alarm aggregation. They get at the right time, the right
to optimise the motor's consumption and help you
information to identify power quality issues related to
pinpoint any deviations. These measurements,
electrical distribution or process, and to manage their impact
particularly those relating to the useful energy
for preventing disrupting operations or damage to the critical
consumed (cos φ), help to define and track
loads and equipment.
the load profile of the motors and their energy
- Maintenance with the local and remote monitoring of
consumption, thus improving the performance of
the equipment the actual condition of assets is updated in
your energy efficiency plan.
real time.
Based on assets diagnostics, the information made available > Using all the available data on the motor
by iPMCC allows to anticipate the failure of any asset and application's energy consumption, you can
to plane appropriate maintenance to avoid an unplanned allocate the cost of electrical energy to each
outage of the individual motor starters, to the entire
iPMCC generates warnings when maintenance is required switchboard and, consequently, to the process
based on a maintenance schedule or when a failure of unit.
equipment is detected iPMCC solutions allow you to convert the energy
Based on the actual condition and the criticality of assets, costs related to production from based costs to
the information generated by iPMCC helps to decide what variable costs.
maintenance is required and when.
- Upgrades with free unassigned slots which
can be incorporated into each switchboard,
you can build on your investment and upgrade
your solution to meet any new requirements,
even at the last minute. The motor starters are
preassembled for easier installation.
1-24
iPMCC by BlokSeT -
a range of intelligent Power
and Motor Control Centre
solution
> iPMCC solutions portfoliois a set of communication > The Data System is composed of communication devices
architectures called the Data System, which embedded like gateways, switches and data concentrator to establish
in equipment, will make it possible to collect and make the link between supervisor an the connected products and
available the necessary data to a supervisor client with the to route data while ensuring availability and reliability of the
level of performance required to drive electro-intensive and transmission
electro-sensitive installation
> In addition, the use of intelligent electronic devices allows
> Nowadays you need control systems that deliver full to gather far more information than before and make
information about the power and motor status (faults, possible the modification of the list of loads at a later stage
overheating), statistics on fuctioning (what occurred in the of the project.
last hours) and also for an "intelligent" protection system,
which can identify the potential risks and send alarms to the > The implimentation of iPMCC solution in the Electric
maintenance staff to act before a failure occurs reducing the Distribution Switchboard will make it possible to benefit from
risk of downtime. Ecostruxure Edge Control applications to manage, monitor
and control industrial installation.
> Using traditional copper wires to transmit this information
would require one wire for each elementary data, resulting
in a great number of cables for each MCC. The number
of wires generates a lot of engineering work and errors
which are very time consuming to detect and correct at
comissioning time. it also requires that the final list of loads
is completely defined at a very early stage in the project
engineering.
> Digitial communications dramatically reduces the number

of cables needed to transfer information, while reducing the
wiring time and limiting the sources of errors.
1-25
A range of
associated services
> Ethernet TCP/IP,
close at hand
Ethernet/IP, Profibus-DP, DeviceNet, You want more efficient solutions that help to boost your installation's performance
Modbus…
and reliability and a provider that offers local services.
Perfect and simple integration
to your local industrial network
(LAN) with the communication
protocol of your choice.
> Pre-tested architectures

Architectures that have been
pre-tested, pre-validated and
documented by our experts both in
electrical distribution and process
control, on the Schneider Electric’s
research and development platform
dedicated to innovative solutions.
> Throughout the world, our Schneider Electric service experts as well as
our licensed partners are attentive to your needs, providing a comprehensive
and unique range of support services for the iPMCC offer to increase the
> Full set of
reliability of your equipment:
engineering tools
- validated tools and architectures
For design, wiring, configuration
- local services for the installed base: availability of components, assistance
and installation : diagrams,
and troubleshooting
guides, choice tables,...
- advice and support for equipment maintenance and renovation
- customised professional training on site or in one of our fifty training
centres.
> Schneider Electric is your essential partner, providing services to help
increase your installation's performance throughout its entire lifecycle.
In addition to services associated with the iPMCC range, Schneider Electric
offers complete audit and consultancy services (engineering expertise,
installation audits, energy audits, comprehensive energy efficiency solutions,
etc.) and solutions engineering (project management and implementation,
site modernisation, customised or critical infrastructure projects, process
simulation, energy management, etc.).
1-28
Solutions that integrate into
your installation, simply
Our iPMCC solutions integrate perfectly into your site network infrastructure, whatever the communication protocol, but also into all energy
management control systems and process
control systems.
> Given the complexity of data flows and > Based on architectures that have been pre-
communication network infrastructures, from tested and pre-validated for an integration in
instrumentation to corporate management the leading communication protocols used
systems, simple to integrate and scalable in process industry and infrastructures, our
solutions are the natural choice. solutions help you rapidly and efficiently
optimise the energy efficiency of your assets.
Example of an Ethernet communication

architecture of a iPMCC solution,
at a process unit level
Innovation Bypass
switch in a Daisy
Chain Loop for
an optimum
dependability
1-29
Digital Logbook
Toss the papers and deliver
the switchboard digitally
> The digital logbook can be initiated by a panel builder using EcoStruxure Power Commission during switchboard
construction. Then during the project handover, this “digital twin” can be shared to the contractor or the Facility
Manager on EcoStruxure Facility Expert. The “Digital Twin” allows people to keep record of important construction
documentations, user guide and maintenance schedules, collaborating better and delivering with greater insights
and cost savings. And once a building is operational, facility managers or service providers have easy access to
key information and maintenance plan which is critical for electrical facility upkeep.
> The Digital Logbook allows you to eliminate paperwork, outdated files, conflicting data and unclear project roles;
Everyone on the project team – from electrical engineers and panel builders to contractors and service providers –
has easy access to vital, up-to-date documentation. A digital representation of the project switchboard is available
to team members via a QR code on the outside of the switchboard panel. This paperless solution provides
convenient reference at all times, including during the factory acceptance test (FAT) at the vendor’s facility and the
site acceptance test (SAT) at your client’s location. It saves time throughout the commissioning, operations, and
maintenance stages of a project.
1-26
Customised solutions
incorporating the best
products and systems
from Schneider Electric
With our wide range of iPMCC solutions we answer to the needs of your
continuous and critical process. For each of your installation, Schneider Electric
and its licensed partners define with you the solution which will perfectly meet your
requirements in terms of electrical distribution (intelligent Power Control Centre -
iPCC) and motor control and protection (intelligent Motor Control Centre - iMCC).
Power circuit protection and control

A range of circuit breakers for the protection, control and isolation of low voltage DC
loads and circuits.
MasterPact, ComPacT NSX / NSXm
> For all configurations:
- fixed or withdrawable equipment
- connection via front/back connector or via cable
- manual, electrical and rotary handle control
> Modularity of auxiliaries and common control units across product ranges
> Simplified selection of protection devices
> Compliance with the requirements of type 2 coordination when combined with
a Schneider Electric contactor
> Protection function with an added energy and power monitoring unit in the ComPacT
NSX range.
Enerlin’X communication modules :
IFE*, IFM* and IO modules*
> Ethernet and Modbus communication module for low voltage circuit breakers
> Fully compatible with ULP system
> Easy configuration
> Embedded web pages
Power consumption and quality measurement

A range for the energy management: measurement, quality, availability.
PowerLogic PM8000 and PM5000
> Optimum equipment performance through energy and power monitoring
> Remote monitoring of electrical equipment (optional remote display unit)
> Power quality monitoring (total harmonic distorsion -THD- metering, individual harmonic
magnitudes and angles, waveform capture, detection of voltage and current disturbances
- sag and swell, etc.)
> Prevention of critical situations using associated alarms
> Logging of data, trends and forecasts (modular options).
Process control
A range of PLCs for process control with communication, diagnostic and data storage
functions.
Quantum, Premium, M340, and M580
> High-level, multitasking system
> Suitable for complex processes
> Shorter cycle times
> Can be installed as a redundant system to ensure maximum dependability of your
installations.
1-30
Integration of the electrical distribution functions (PCC),
motor control and protection functions (MCC) into intelligent
and communicating architectures (iPMCC)
A range of LV functional systems for the realisation of safe Schneider Electric
switchboards which are compliant IEC 61439 and provide a maximum level of
dependability (continuity of service, safety of personnel and assets, maintainability)
throughout the entire lifecycle, even in the most severe environments.
iPMCC by BlokSeT
> Electrical distribution (iPCC) up to 7000 A
> Motor control and protection (iMCC) up to 250 kW - 525 V, 300 kW - 690 V.
Speed drives
A range of variable speed drives and soft starters for effortless variable speed control
offering extensive power, application and protection options for the entire installation
(drive, motor, machine, environment).
Altivar ATV630, ATV930, ATV320, Altistart ATS480
> A perfect match whatever your requirements - simple machines, pumping and
ventilation machines, high power machines
> Power and energy measurement and power quality control
> Sub-metering and cost allocation
> Optimum demand and power factor management
> Load analysis and circuit optimisation.
Motor control and protection

A wide range of relays, motor controllers and management systems to meet all your
needs, from the simplest to the most complex.
TeSys T, TeSys U and TeSys D
> Comprehensive motor protection supported by a range of metering, control and
monitoring functions
> Modular design - adapted to your requirements with an optional module for additional
protection functions (voltage and power measurement, additional inputs).
Connected Offer
Getting services thanks to cloud enability (Com’X 200 Energy Server)
1 Measure and collect 2 Collect to understand 3 Understand and save
Integrated communication Ready to connect to asset Data-driven energy
interfaces and energy management efficiency actions
platforms
Embedded metering and
control capabilities
> Large embedded connectivity (I/Os, Ethernet, Modbus, GPRS...)
> Worldwide unique solution for remote connection (GPRS + SIM card + Vodafone)
> Easy to install and configure : plug & connect ready to commission the data acquisition
up to the cloud platform
> Easy connection to the RSP* (Data delivery, Device Management): register and
connect with the unique Schneider Electric service infrastructure
And much more functions…

(*) IFE: Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker and gateway
Example of an iPMCC configuration IFM: Modbus SL interface for LV circuit breaker
IO: input/output interface module for LV circuit breaker
RSP: Remote service platform
1-31
1-32
Introduction My Personalized Experience
What is Personalized Experience?
The new online service to facililate your business.
Whatever be your profession, this site provides all the help you might
need:
• marketing information
• technical transfer file
• trainings
• a network of people who face the same challenges as you
Connect here : https://www.se.com/myschneider/
Why Schneider Electric Personalized Experience?
To be closer to Schneider Electric at all the

steps of your business,...
...to be connected with Schneider Electric at all times (blog,

forum, etc.),...
...through a single
reference website,....
BlokSeT
evo Low voltage switchboard
Master catalogue 2021
se.com
.....providing you the most

reliable tools (downloadable),...
BLK011901E 1-33
Introduction My Personalized Experience
Trainings Programs
for upskilling
Topics for you where they will find TTF in the Benefit
their team
with update News
Quicklinks
for software/
Application/
Tool
Account
documents
for Private
information
1-34 BLK011901E
Introduction EcoStruxure Power Build
Switchboard software
What is EcoStruxure Power Build?

A tool for panelbuilders to realize:
b switchboard configuration,
b switchboard quotation,
b switchboard BOM order.
Why EcoStruxure Power Build?

b BlokSeT switchboards offer a wide range of solutions.
EcoStruxure Power Build helps the panelbuilder to choose the most optimized
configuration.
b Each customer need is unique.
EcoStruxure Power Build helps the panelbuilder to give a quick and reliable
quotation to his customer.
How EcoStruxure Power Build is done?

b Configurator
v User dialog with mindset & language of the end user
v appropriate configuration mechanisms
v quick comparison of different solutions according to different assumptions
v quick translation to engineering language
b Database
v structured on offer architecture
v taking the solution rules into account
v with all the documents needed for the project (bill of materials).
Offer
architecture
Based on end user
needs
Easy Power Build Reliable

to use
software database
Based on: Based on:
end user criteria end user criteria
designer offer
needs structure
BLK011901E 1-35
Introduction EcoStruxure Power Build
Switchboard software
EcoStruxure Power Build screens
What EcoStruxure Power Build offers?
Quick More
use
Ease of n ns
quotatio quotatio
More
Reliable Reliable More
orders
databa
se answer confiden
ce
Most
Optimiz
ed Best
suitable
n answer
choices solutio
1-36 BLK011901E
Introduction Technical transfer file
The transfer file is a collection of helpful tools for each step of business.
From pre-sales to after-sales, the panelbuilder can find in this file all relevant
information that would help in quotation, installation, assembly and maintenance of
the swithboard.
TTF News BlokSeT News

b presentation to showcase the new functionalities
in comparison with the previous version
Marketing Marketing Tools

Collection of tools:
b to explain the offer architecture,
b to present Schneider Electric BlokSeT solution.
b introduction to Green Premium complaince.
Promotional Docs
b Promotional Documents.
Technical Technical Specification

b technical specifications of the offer and design
rules.
BlokSeT Catalog
b BlokSeT Offer details, rules and specifications..
BOM Preparation Tools

Prototype b Use EcoStruxure Power Build or Reference
guide for BOM creation.
EcoStruxure Power Build

Switchboard software that provides:
b switchboard quotations
b BOM ordering support
b switchboard configurations
Drawings
Prototype b Parts and Assembly drawings, DMT software.
BLK011901E 1-37
Introduction Technical transfer file
Industry Industrial Information

b technical specifications for manufacturing -
subcontracting.
b guide to prepare / use the workshop tools.
Assembly
b guides to assembly rules with respect to the
offer
b checklists for validating prototypes
Core Part BlokSeT Parts

b list of mandatory and optional core parts used
Quality Quality
b the Low voltage switchboard quality guide.
b checking cards to help verifying specific points
during and at the end of the manufacturing..
Installation Customer Installation and Maintenance Guide

b provides installation rules to install the
switchboard at the customer’s site.
b provides guideline for proper maintenance of
switchboard.
Prototype Prototype
Guides to:
b prepare and manufacture a prototype
b checklists for validating prototypes
Certificate Certificates book

b collection of type test certificates.
1-38 BLK011901E
Introduction
BLK012000E 1-39
Introduction Panorama
Equipments & Systems solutions
Prisma iPM
subdistribution low voltage
switchboard
BlokSeT
low voltage main
switchboard
Medium voltage/low
voltage
transformator
MCset
medium voltage
switchboard
1-40 BLK012000E
Introduction Panorama
Equipment & Systems solutions
Prisma iPM
subdistribution low voltage
switchboard
Canalis / I line II
decentralised
distribution
BLK012000E 1-41
Introduction Panaroma
BlokSeT configurations
BlokSeT range is organised through five types of cubicles to answer both

Power control centres (PCC) and Motor control centres (MCC)
D Dc Mw2 Mf Ms
All low voltage power

applications in one
equipment
Power Control ■ ■ ■
Center
Application
Motor Control ■ ■ ■
Center
Incomer ■ ■
Function
Feeder ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Disconnec- ■
table
Type Withdrawable ■ ■ ■
Fixed ■ ■ ■ ■
PCC: Power Control Center, MCC: Motor Control Center,
VSD: Variable Speed Drive, PFC: Power Factor Correction
Colour coding: PCC: Green, MCC: Orange
1-42 BLK012000E
Introduction Withdrawability of functional units
Composition
BlokSeT offers several options to answer the installation needs and the service
Functional unit continuity required.
The withdrawability is defined by 3 letters.
3
p p p
Auxiliaries
1 2 3rd letter: auxiliaries connection (coils, contacts, …)

possible values: W and F.
2nd letter: power downstream connection
possible values: W, D and F.
1st letter: power upstream connection
possible values: W, D and F.
Letter value signification
W D F
Withdrawable Disconnectable Fixed
No direct access to the Possible direct action on the The connections are
connections of the functional downstream connections of screwed
Signification unit the functional unit
Only the concerned Only the concerned Whole switchboard must be

Condition for any action functional unit must be functional unit must be turned off
on the functional unit turned off turned off
Work on the functional With some precautions, Forbid any internal access
Security while operating units is possible even if the work on the functional units to the switchboard.
the switchboard switchboard is turned on is possible even with the
switchboard turned on
< 1/4 h 1/4 h < t < 1 h > 1h

Maintenance /
upgrade time
3b 2b 1
Minimum form required
BLK014000E 1-43
Introduction Very high power incomer / feeder
MasterPact MTZ3 / NW
Principle of high electrical

distribution:
BlokSeT makes it easier
to install, maintain and
upgrade incomers and
feeders in high-safety
switchboards up to 6000 A.
Type of cubicle
D
In vertical link (ACB to HBB)
Max Current rating at 35 °C 6000 A
Incomers
MTZ3 40 / NW40b
MTZ3 50 / NW50
MTZ3 63 / NW63
Feeders
> 630 A MTZ3 40 / NW40b
MTZ3 50 / NW50
MTZ3 63 / NW63
Withdrawability of devices
PB115951
Auxiliaries W
W W
1-44 BLK014000E
Introduction High power incomer / feeder
MasterPact MTZ2 / NW / NS 4000 A

distribution:
upgrade incomers and
feeders in high-safety
optimized busbar cubicle up
to 4000 A.
Type of cubicle
D
In vertical link (ACB to HBB)
Incomers
MTZ2 32 / NW32
MTZ2 40 / NW40
NS3200
Feeders
> 630A MTZ2 32 / NW32
MTZ2 40 / NW40
NS3200
Withdrawability of devices
Auxiliaries F
PB115943
F F
Auxiliaries W
W W
BLK014000E 1-45
Introduction High power incomer / feeder
MasterPact MTZ1-2 / NW / NT
ComPacT NS

distribution: BlokSeT makes
it easier to install, maintain
and upgrade incomers
and feeders in high-safety
switchboards upto 3250 A.
Type of cubicle
D
In distribution busbar
Incomers
MTZ2 08-25 / NW08-25
MTZ1 06-16 / NT06-16
NS630b-2500
Feeders
> 630A MTZ2 08-25 / NW08-25
MTZ 1 06-16 / NT06-16
NS630b-2500
Withdrawability
PB115935
PB115943
Auxiliaries F
F F
Auxiliaries W
056471N
W W
1-46 BLK014000E
Introduction Feeders
ComPacT NSX / NSXm / GV
This fixed PCC/MCC

solution combines ease of
implementation, economy
and operating safety.
Type of cubicle
D, Mf
Incomers
-
Feeders
PCC / MCC GV2 / GV3 / GV4 / GV7
NSX100-630 / NSXm160
fixed mounting plate y 250 kW
Withdrawability
105536_SE
Auxiliaries F
F F
Fixed device
BLK014000E 1-47
Introduction Feeders
ComPacT NSX
Auxiliaries D
D D
Plug-in device
Auxiliaries W
W W
Device on chasis
Note: Device on chasis available only in compact NSX.
1-48 BLK014000E
Introduction Feeder
Drawers
Principle of feeders in
withdrawable drawers:
upgrade motor feeders and
electrical distribution in
high-safety switchboards.
Type of cubicle
Mw2
Incomers
-
Feeders
MCC drawer y 250 kW

upto 630 A
PCC
Withdrawability
PD401014
Auxiliaries W
W W
BLK014100E 1-49
Introduction High Power Incomer / Feeder
MW2 Mix with MTZ1/NT /NS and
MTZ2/NW
Combination of Mw2
Drawers and ACB:
BlokSeT makes it easier to
install combination of ACB
& Drawers for electrical
distribution in High safety
switchboard.
Type of cubicle
Mw2 Mix
Max Current rating at 35C 1350 A - MTZ1/NT/NS
2050 0 MTZ2/NW
Incomers
-
Feeders
MCC drawer y 250 kW

PCC upto 630 A
Withdrawability
PD401014
Auxiliaries W
W W
1-50 BLK014100E
Introduction Variable speed drive
and soft starter
Variable speed drive is the

essential additional function
for controlling motors.
The functional units are
fixed / Withdrawable
(Upto 22kW VSD is also
available in withdrawable).
Type of cubicle
Ms
Incomers
-
Feeders
> 630A MCC b GV2 / GV 3 / GV4 / NSX 100-630
b Variable Speed Drive’s ATV630
ATV930 / ATV320 / ATS480
Withdrawability
Fixed device
Auxiliaries F
F F
BLK014200E 1-51
Introduction Variable speed drive
and soft starter
Device in drawer
New ATV-drawer.eps
Auxiliaries W
W W
1-52 BLK014300E
Introduction Power factor correction and
harmonic filtering
The BlokSeT reactive

power factor and harmonic
filtering correction range
combines optimised choice
with ease of installation of
anti-pollution solutions for
electrical networks.
Type of cubicle
Dc
Max Current rating at 35 °C up to 3200 A
Max LV capacitor rating/cubicle
685 kVAr at 400 V
Withdrawability
Auxiliaries F
F F
BLK014400E 1-53
Introduction Power factor correction and
harmonic filtering
BlokSeT solutions
The VarPlus Can power factor correction modules are designed to be installed in
power factor correction cubicles which are either freestanding or integrated in the
Main General Distribution Board.
PB100029
VarPlus Can power factor correction modules makes it possible to cover different
power ratings (kVAR), depending on the voltage(V), the frequency (Hz) and the
harmonic pollution level of the network.
The purpose of the detuned reactors is to protect the capacitors and prevent the
amplification of harmonics present on the network.
detuned reactor
PB100031_SE
Reactive power control

b The VarPlus Logic PF controller mounted on the front of the switchboard
provides essential additional support by controlling the reactive power.
b In its communicating version, it transmits information and alarms to a control
station, which is of considerable assistance in running and maintaining the power
factor correction and filtering facility.
VarPlus Logic controller
The Schneider Electric solution for active harmonic filtering in building and
commercial installations.
1-54 BLK014400E
Introduction Power factor correction
Selection
U max = 415 V U max = 690 V
few very few

polluted polluted
polluted polluted polluted
network network
network network network
VarPlus Can
VarPlus Can components
A wide selection for sensitive applications Statistical studies determine the frequency of the solutions used, according to the
applications.
SDuty HDtudy
Pollution rate up to Gh / Sn y 20%
Not adapted Automotive
Usually Water treatment
Possibily Mines & Minerals
Infrastructures
Tertiary
Agri-food
Sn: apparent power of the transformer.

Gh: apparent power of harmonics-generating loads (variable speed motors, static converters,
power electronics, etc.).
It is however recommended that measurements be carried out on site to ensure that

the correct solution is adopted.
A source of energy savings Power factor correction means using your transformer and your facility at maximum
efficiency by reducing losses (iron, heat, etc.)
Power output by your transformer (kVA)

Cos (π) 250 400 630 1000 1600
0.5 125 200 315 500 800
0.7 175 280 441 700 1120
0.9 225 360 567 900 1440
0.95 238 380 598 950 1520
BLK014400E 1-55
Introduction Double Front Solution
The Offer
Mw2 side connection cubicles, W800 and W1000, can be mounted
back to back (double front solution) for an optimized footprint.
b For detailed information on the Double front buscoupler solution, refer

v Column for double front connection
v Busbar types
v Main busbar (In < 4000 A)
v Main busbar 4000 A < In ≤ 7300 A
v Electrical and mechanical data - Busbar solutions
v Equipotential Link - double front solution
v Modularity
b Below configurations:
v ComPacT NS630b to 1250
v MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT06 to 16
v MasterPact MTZ2 08 to 16 / NW08 to 16
v MasterPact MTZ2 20 to 25 / NW20 to 25
v MasterPact MTZ2 32 / NW32
v MasterPact MTZ2 40 / NW40
v MasterPact MTZ3 40 to 63 / NW40b to 63
Note: To return to this page, click on the Double Front icon displayed in the
sections you navigate to.
Page 1-57
Benefits Large installed base. Thanks to horizontal busbar configuration, all single front
cubicles can be proposed in double front solution taking benefit of a very large
installed based.
Double front offers the customer the following benefits:
b Copper optimization
b Same modularity from 1250 to 6300
b ComPacT design (total depth does not exceed 1200mm)
In terms of footprint optimization, the solution offers:

b Optimized area for installation
b An answer to refurbishment projects requiring space installation constraints
b Cost optimization compared to a single front solution > 5 meters.
Markets A new solution for large sites:
b MMM
b Mining, minerals, metals, cement & glass industry
b Oil & Gas
b Refining, gas processing & petrochemical
1-56 BLK014400E
Introduction Double Front Solution
Busbar Architecture
BlokSeT double front is a powerful offer based on the experience, the efficiency and
the success of the single front offer.
Seismic Withstand b Guaranteed safety in seismic environment. Assured safety even in seismic
environments with BlokSeT 2G.
b Continuity of service safely ensured after earthquake.
Safety Compliance b Compliant with IEC 61439-2 standard.

b Tested by independents test laboratories, approved by LOVAG, ASEFA, ASTA
(Intertek), DEKRA & CESI.
BLK014400E 1-57
Notes
Description and
characteristics
Electrical and mechanical data 2-2

Busbar solutions 2-2
Compartment definition 2-5

Modularity 2-7
Types of drawer connection 2-9
BLK040000E 2-1
Description and Electrical and mechanical data
characteristics
Busbar solutions
Busbar choices
There are two types of busbar in BlokSeT.
b Flat copper busbar
b Linergy busbar
The ranges are as below:

b Copper offers up to 7000 A
b Linergy offers up to 1250 A
Flat copper busbar Linergy busbar
For more details regarding busbar positioning in different cubicles, refer to the
busbar section "Busbar types", page 11-5.
Note: Harmonics impact on derating to be considered while defining busbar

cross sections or device rating
Copper flat busbars

Front view 45 mm
The right end side of the horizontal busbar is positioned 45 mm from the outside
edge of the column frame, with the left end side lined up with the edge of the frame.
Different claddings exist for all busbars:

b Bare
b Tin-plated
b Silver-plated
b Insulated
b Tin-plated and insulated
b Silver-plated and insulated
Top view - standard busbar arrangement
Provide splice bar connection holes for any future extensions.
For detailed information on busbar postioning, refer "Busbar types", page 11-5.
125 mm
Top view - double front arrangement

45 mm
125 mm
125 mm
Page 1-57
45 mm
2-2 BLK040000E
characteristics Busbar solutions
Linergy busbars
Front view 10 mm The right end side of the horizontal busbar is positioned 10 mm from the outside
edge of the column frame, with the left end side lined up with the edge of the frame.
Linergy busbars are not available with the Ms and Dc columns.
For detailed information on busbar postioning, refer "Busbar types", page 11-5.
Top view - Linergy busbar arrangement

125 mm
Fishplates
Copper sliding fishplates b Fishplates are used to connect Horizontal busbars together.
b They can be prepared and installed at the factory.
b Coupling with another cubicle will be done at the customer site.
The fishplates for copper busbars are of sliding type and wills be easily
assembled at the customer site.
Linergy fishplates
The fishplates for linergy bars are of 2 types:
v horizontal fishplates
v vertical fishplates
The profile of linergy busbars, makes it easier to connect the fishplates without the
need for drilling.
Horizontal fishplates Vertical fishplates
BLK040000E 2-3
characteristics Busbar solutions
Equipotential Link - double front solution
Inherently by design, the current between the 2 sets of horizontal busbars are
balanced. In fact, the loading can be 60% and 40% or vice versa between the 2 sets
of busbars. In case if the loading exceeds the above pattern due to load demands,
use of equipotential links is recommended. For more details on these links, refer
drawing number EAV78186.
Below is an example showcasing when an equipotential link is to be used:

Considering an example of MTZ2 40 double front incomer and multiple feeders with
one 1600 A feeder, this offer is possible in 2 solutions.
Solution 1:
b In this case, there is a load imbalance between the front and rear cubicle by a
ratio of 70:30
b Here, there is a requirement of an equipotential link before the cubicle with the
maximum imbalance (before the 1600 A cubicle)
OR
Solution 2:
b In this case, we can use the double front connection type-2 / type-1 with the
depth of the feeder cubicle being 1200 mm.
b Here, we DO NOT REQUIRE any equipotential links, as the 1600 A feeder will
draw current from both the horizontal busbars.
Page 1-57
2-4 BLK040000E
Description and Compartment definition
characteristics
D, Dc, Mf, Ms, Mw2 cubicles
BlokSeT switchboards are constituted of

several associated columns.
Each column is made by the association

of a device cubicle and a cable
compartment and / or an auxiliaries
compartment.
switchboard = association of columns column = association of cubicles and

compartments
Width (mm) X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)

400 400 -
600 - 600 -
400 200
200 400 -
700 - 700 -
800 - 600 200
200 400 200
2200 900 200 700 -
- 700 200
- 600 300
1000 - 600 400
200 400 400
1100 200 700 200
400 700 -
- 700 400
1200 - 1200 -
1300 200 700 400
400 700 200
Z Note: Y=600 mm in case of MW2 cubicle only.
Y
X
X vertical busbar compartment Y device cubicle Z cable compartment
Note:
v All Dimensions are in "mm".
v Hight 2200 is column hight Excluding Plinth &
Ventilation Hood.w
Types of connection
b Rear connection (RC): Top & Bottom Cable/ Busway terminations are at the rear side of the cubicle.
b Side connection (SC): Cable terminations are at the side of the cubicle.
b Top direct connection (TDC): Cable/Busway entry is from the top of the cubicle.
b Bottom direct connection (BDC): Cable entry is from the bottom of the cubicle.
BLK040000E 2-5
Description and Compartment definition
characteristics
Type of connection
BlokSeT cubicles
BDC: Bottom direct connection [1] RC: Rear connection TDC: Top direct connection [2] SC: Side connection
[1] busbar at the top [2] busbar at the bottom
Example: Rear connection column + Side connection column

If the switchboard is made up of both rear and side connection columns, BlokSeT
provides you the following choices :
b either a constant depth throughout the whole switchboard’s length, by the
addition of rear connection compartments at the back of the side connection
columns.
b or a variable depth for the rear connection column (highest depth) by the addition
DD405029
of specific lateral panels.
Example of rear + lateral connection

switchboard
DD405038
depth 1000 mm 400

throughout its
whole length
600
700 200 700 700 400
switchboard depth
DD405038b
600 mm for SC
columns, and
DD405029b
1000 mm for RC
column
700 200 700 700 400
A device cubicle B cable compartment
complementary rear compartments
lateral panel to be manufactured according to

supplied drawing
2-6 BLK040000E
Description and Modularity
characteristics
D, Dc, Mf and Ms cubicles architecture

Device installation zone
Single horizontal busbar (I y 4000 A)
Modularity 4 modules for the busbar
horizontal 36 for the switchgear
busbar
Double horizontal busbar (I u 4000 A)

vertical 32 for the switchgear
busbar
Double front horizontal busbar (I upto 6300 A)
device 36 for the switchgear
installation Note: 1 module = 50 mm
zone
BlokSeT switchboards are designed on the 50 mm module principle. All fixing holes
are at 25 mm distances.
Page 1-57
Mw2 cubicle architecture

DD401027

Single horizontal busbar at the top
VBB Type Double VBB Single VBB
top link Cubicle Height 2200 2200

cover
No. Of Poles 3P 3P+N/4P 3P 3P+N/4P
Modularity 35 Modules 34 Modules 35 Modules 35 Modules
Single horizontal busbar at the bottom

device
installation VBB Type Double VBB Single VBB
zone
Cubicle Height 2200 2200
bottom link
cover
Double horizontal busbar at the top
Cubicle Height 2200 2200
Bottom link cover dimension

Double HBB Top 37 37 37 37
Single HBB Top 17.5 62 17.5 17.5
Top link cover dimension

Single HBB Bottom 27.5 77.5 27.5 27.5
Note: 1 module = 50 mm. All dimensions in mm unless specified.
BLK040000E 2-7
Description and Modularity
characteristics
Mw2 Mix cubicle architecture

DD401027

Single horizontal busbar at the top
top link Cubicle Height 2200 2200
cover
device
installation Modularity Mw2 Mix 25 M (RC) 25 M (RC) 25 M (RC) 25 M (RC)
zone : (ACB) MTZ1/NT
21 M (SC) 21 M (SC) 21 M (SC) 21 M (SC)
device Modularity Mw2 Mix 19 M (RC) 19 M (RC) 20 M (RC) 20 M (RC)

installation MTZ2/NW
zone
Double horizontal busbar at the top

bottom link Cubicle Height 2200 2200
cover
Modularity Mw2 Mix 21 M (RC) 21 M (RC) 21 M (RC) 21 M (RC)
MTZ1/NT
17 M (SC) 17 M (SC) 17 M (SC) 17 M (SC)
Modularity Mw2 Mix 16 M (RC) 16 M (RC) 17 M (RC) 17 M (RC)
MTZ2/NW
2-8 BLK040000E
Description and Types of t connection
characteristics
Power connection
DD405662
The power connectors depend on the functional unit rating and the short circuit
level.
DD405661
b There are 5 types of connectors depending on the current of the functional unit:
v S connector: I max = 32 A
v M connector: I max = 63 A
v XM connector: I max = 250 A
v L connector: I max = 250 A
v XL connector: I max = 630 A
S connector
DD405665
DD405664
M connector
DD405642
DD405666
L connector XM clamp XL clamp.
Auxiliary connection
Withdrawable auxiliary blocks

rated insulation voltage (Ui) 500 V
rated operation voltage (Ue) 230 V AC
rated current (In) 10 A
signal maximum frequency 100 Mb / s max. (*)
equipment capacity 1 block of 48 contacts max.
(*) in accordance with the following communication buses:

- Ethernet
- Modbus SL
- Profibus DP (1.5 Mb)
- DeviceNet
- CanOpen(*)
BLK041000E 2-9
Notes
Electrical distribution
> 630 A
Incomers / Feeders 3-2

Selection of the functional unit 3-4
Option Connections 3-5
ComPact
ComPact NS630b to 1250 3-7
ComPact NS1600b to 2500 3-25
ComPact NS3200 3-28
MasterPact
MasterPact
MTZ1 06 to 16
NT06 to 16 3-31
MasterPact
MTZ2 08 to 16
NW08 to 16 3-44
MasterPact
MTZ2 20 to 25
NW20 to 25 3-56
MasterPact
MTZ2 32
NW32 3-67
MasterPact
MTZ2 40
NW40 3-76
MasterPact
MTZ2 40/NW40 4000A/3650A 3-92
MasterPact
MTZ3 40 to 63 3-96
NW40b to 63 3-98
I-Line II copper busway 3-103
BLK051010E 3-1
Power Control Center Incomers / Feeders
> 630 A
Overview
Choosing devices
High current incomers and feeders are realized with:
■ air circuit breakers MasterPact MTZ2/MTZ3 and NW(800 to 6300 A)
PB115943
PB115935
■ fixed or withdrawable ultra-compact air circuit breakers MasterPact MTZ1 / NT

056471N
(630 to 1600 A)
■ moulded case circuit breakers ComPacT NS (630 to 3200 A)
■ compact NS 630b - NS 1600 circuit-breakers are installed in columns type D, and
operate within a power ranging from 630 to 1600 A.
MasterPact MTZ1 / 2 / 3, NW / NT ComPacT NS
They are generally used as front devices.
When equipped with electronic control unit (only for masterpact), they can be easily
a part of a communicating switchboard.
The principle of filtered breaking in MasterPact circuit-breakers limits the

E58875
switchboard’s pollution and allows a reduced safety area.

056444N
Lockable insulating shutters (option) protect the plug-in clamps and ensures an IP3x
protection.
The device can be equipped with a multi-locking system.

filtered breaking insulating shutters
The "Normal-Replacement" or "Incoming-Coupling" functions are carried out in a
minimum space, thanks to the association of several circuit-breakers with inter-
locking systems.
Implementing in BlokSeT switchboards

Advanced tests have been performed to implement these circuit-breakers in
059278
BlokSeT switchboards :
■ to reduce the quantity of copper needed for the connection (from top, bottom or
rear)
■ to ensure short-circuit current withstand:
□ up to 100 kA rms/1sec for HBB
□ up to 100 kA rms/1sec for VBB
■ to reduce all maintenance operations, cutting them to those of the devices.
lateral connection for cables
3-2 BLK051010E
Power Control Center Incomers / Feeders
> 630 A
Overview
Circuit breaker derating coefficient

A comprehensive list of configurations (the most frequent) are drawn up in addition
to the circuit breaker derating.
The respective breaker tables indicate the admissible currents for each type of
circuit breaker in accordance with:
■ the outside ambient temperature
■ the degree of protection and
■ the position in the switchboard
Altitude plays an important part in influencing the circuit breaker characteristics. It

does not infuence the characteristics up to 2000 m.
Overall, the circuit breaker must be derated by applying the following coefficient:
Altitude 0 - 2000 m 3000 m 4000 m 5000 m

Derating factor for 1 0.99 0.96 0.94
MasterPact circuit
breakers
ComPacT circuit
breakers
Altitude 0 - 2000 m 3000 m 4000 m 5000 m

Derating factor for the 1 0.88 0.78 0.68
voltage
BLK051010E 3-3
Power Control Center Selection of the functional unit
> 630 A
Overview
In (A) Icw max (kA) Max. qty of circuit Type of circuit Cubicle In distribution
breakers per breaker busbar (A)
cubicle
Standard Roof Ventilated Roof
3900 < In < 6600 4000 < In < 7000 85 / 100 1 MTZ3 40-63 7000
1 NW40b-63
type D
3300 < In < 3800 3350 < In < 3900 85 / 100 1 MTZ2 40 / NW40 3900
85 1 MTZ2 32 / NW32
85 1 NS3200
65 1
65 1
type D
800 < In < 3300 800 < In < 3600 85 / 100 2 MTZ2 20-25 3600
85 2 NW20-25
85 3 MTZ2 16 / NW16
85 1 NS2000 - NS2500
1 NS1600b
3 NS630b
3 MTZ1 06-16
3 NT06-16
65 2
65 3
type D
800 < In < 1600 800 < In < 2000 85 3 MTZ208-16 2000
50 / 85 3 NW08-16
50 / 85 3 NS630b - NS1600
6 NS630b - NS1000
42 / 85 (horizontal position)
3 MTZ1 06-16
3 NT06-16
65 3
type D
Note: These are recommended configurations. For extended one, please consult us.
3-4 BLK051010E
Power Control Center Option Connections
> 630 A
Overview
Choice of the functional unit
The upstream and downstream breaker connections are defined below:
Connection to Busbar
Option HBB position VBB position
1 bottom -
2 top -
3a - left top
3b - left bottom
4a - right top
4b - right bottom
Customer Connection
Option Breaker Depth

terminal (mm)
6a top 1000 / 1200
6b bottom 1000 / 1200
7a bottom 600
7b top 600
8a top -
8b bottom -
8c bottom -
8d top -
9 bottom -
10 top -
11a top 600 / 1000 / 1200
11b bottom 1000
BLK051010E 3-5
Power Control Center Option Connections
> 630 A
Overview
Connection combination possibilities

1+6 in BlokSeT
1+6 1+6
1 + 8a 1 + 8a 1 + 8a
600 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm
1 +10
1000 mm 1200 mm600 mm 1000 mm
Rear connection Side connection 600Side
mm connection Top direct connection Rear-Top Busway
6 and 7 8a 8d 10 connection
Bottom horizontal
(6 or 10) + 11a*
busbar
1
2 + 8b
2+9
2+6 600 mm 1000 mm 2+5 1200 mm
Rear connection Side connection Side connection Bottom direct Rear-Top
600 mm Busway 1000 mm
Top horizontal busbar
2+7
6 and 7 600 mm 8b 1000 mm 8c 1200 mm connection connection
9 6 + 11b
2
3a + 6b, 3a +7b 1200 mm

1000 mm
600 mm 3a + 8b 3a + 9
1000 mm 1000 mm
600 mm 600 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm
Rear connection Side connection Bottom direct

6 and 7 8b connection
Left vertical busbar
3b + 6
1000 mm
600 mm 1200 mm
3a
3b + 8a 3b + 10
1000 mm 1000 mm
600 mm 600 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm
Rear connection Side connection Top direct

6 and 7 8a connection
10
3b
4a + 6 1200 mm
1000 mm
600 mm
4a + 9 1200 mm
1000 mm
Rear connection Side connection Bottom direct 600 mm
6 and 7 8c connection
Right vertical busbar
9
4a
4b + 6 1000 mm
600 mm 1200 mm
1000 mm
4b + 10 600 mm 1200 mm
Rear connection Side connection Top direct connection

6 and 7 8d 10
Right vertital busbar
4b
3-6 BLK051010E
Power Control Center ComPacT NS630b to 1600
> 630 A
Overview
Installation rules The cubicle

■ The NS630b/800/1000/1250/1600 can be mounted in four width possibilities 700
mm, 900 mm or 1100/1300 mm.
■ It can accept:
□ distribution and motor control feeders.
□ When connected in vertical position: a maximum of three devices of 1350A
(NS1600) can be mounted.
□ When connected in horizontal position: a maximum of six devices of 1000A
(NS100) can be mounted.
The functional unit

■ Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, and are usually used as Incomers or
feeders.
■ Can be mounted in either a through/behind door.
■ The free area around the device can be used to install auxiliaries or measuring
instruments.
■ Special connection pads are used to connect the device. Depending on the
connection type, either the top or bottom pad is connected to either of the following:
□ busbar
□ load
■ Connection to the load can be done:
□ by cables, directly from the top or from the rear.
□ or by busbar trunking, directly from the top or from the rear.
Functional unit dimensions

Device Horizontal Breaker Operating Breaker Busbar & Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
Mounting Busbar Position mechanism Type Customer connection mm Cubicle mm
Position Single Double connection access X Y Z Width
Type mm
NS630b - X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 6 Rear 9M - 700 - 1000 3
1600
Vertical X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 7 Rear 9M - 700 - 600 3
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 7 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 200 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 400 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Drawout 1 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 1000 3
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Drawout 1 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 200 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 400 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 2 6 Rear 9M - 700 - 1000 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 2 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 1000 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 2 7 Rear 9M - 700 - 600 3
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 2 7 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 200 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M - 700 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 600 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - 600 4
Drawout
BLK051010E 3-7
> 630 A
Overview
Type mm
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 200 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed / 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 700 - 1000 3
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 700 - 600 3
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 200 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M 200 700 400 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 600 4
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 3
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 4
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 3
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200 + 1000 3
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 4
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200 + 600 3
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door ERH/DRH Fixed 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 200 + 600 4
700
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 1 6 Rear 9M - 700 - 1000 3
Door MM Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 1000 4
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 200 600 4
Door MM Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 400 600 4
Door MM Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 600 4
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
Door MM Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/ Fixed/ 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 200 600 4
Door MM Drawout
ERH: Extended Rotary Handle MM: Motor Mechanism

DRH: Direct Rotary Handle SF: Single Front architecture
Tog: Toggle DF: Double Front architecture
3-8 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Type mm
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M - 700 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Drawout 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 600 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 200 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 700 - 1000 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 1000 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 700 - 600 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 200 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M 200 700 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 3
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 4
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 3
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200 + 1000 3
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 1000 4
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200 + 600 3
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700
X X Through DRH/Tog/MM Fixed/ 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700

BLK051010E 3-9
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal Breaker Operating No of Customer Modularity Width Right Depth IP Form
Mounting Busbar Position mecha- Pole connection mm Cubicle mm
Position Single Double nism access X Y Z Width
mm
NS630b - X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 200 700 600/1000 IP31 4
1000 Door
Horizontal
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 200 700 200 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 200 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Front 6M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Front 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Front 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Front 10M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 700 200+700 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 700 200+700 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 200 700 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 600/1000 IP31 3
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 700 200+700 1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 700 200+700 1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 3P Rear 6M 200 700 1000 IP31 4
Door
X Through DRH/Tog 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 1000 IP31 4
Door
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 200 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 200 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 200 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 200 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog

3-10 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal Breaker Operating No of Customer Modularity Width Right Depth IP Form
Mounting Busbar Position mecha- Pole connection mm Cubicle mm
Position Single Double nism access X Y Z Width
mm
NS630b - X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 400 1000 IP54 4
1000 Door Tog
Horizontal
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 400 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Front 6M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Front 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Front 8M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Front 10M 200 700 400 600/1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 700 200+700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 700 200+700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 600/1000 IP54 3
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 700 200+700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 700 200+700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 3P Rear 6M 200 700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog
X Behind ERH/DRH/ 4P/3P+N Rear 8M 200 700 1000 IP54 4
Door Tog

BLK051010E 3-11
Power Control Center ComPact NS630b to 1600
400mm Width offer
> 630 A
Overview

■ The NS630b/800/1000/1250/1600 can be mounted in 400 mm, 600 mm, 1000 mm or 800 mm
frame size.
■ It can accept PCC distribution feeders.
■ When connected in vertical position: a maximum of two devices can be mounted depending
on connection type and Form
■ Thermoset support can be used only for HBB, Circuit breaker connections will be using only
Thermoplastic supports.
The functional unit

■ Devices are both fixed and withdrawable can be mounted in either a through/behind door with
DRH, TOGGLE & Motorised Breaker Operating mechanism options.
■ Used as Incomers only in single front architecture ( 600mm & 1000 mm depth).
■ Used as feeders in both single front architecture ( 600mm & 1000 mm depth) and Double front
architecture (1200mm depth).
■ 3P and 3P+N (PEN) NS incomers or feeders.
■ Special connection pads are used to connect the device. Depending on the connection type,
either the top or bottom pad is connected to either of the following:
□ busbar
□ load
■ Connection to the load can be done by cables, directly from the top or from the rear.
■ Device derating values for W400 offer are same as standard NS630b-1600 derating values
provided in the below section of this catalogue.
■ ACB function unit not applicable to fishbone solution.

Device Horizontal Breaker Oper- Breaker Busbar & Custom- Modularity Width Right Depth Form
Mounting Busbar Position ating Type Customer er con- mm Cu- mm
Position mecha- connec- nection bicle
Sin- Dou- X Y Z
nism tion Type access Width
gle ble
mm
NS630b - X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 6 Rear 9M - 400 - 1000 3
1600
Vertical X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 7 Rear 9M - 400 - 600 3
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 7 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 200 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Drawout 1 6 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 1000 3
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Drawout 1 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 200 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 2 6 Rear 9M - 400 - 1000 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 2 6 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 1000 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 2 7 Rear 9M - 400 - 600 3
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 2 7 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 200 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M - 400 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 4
Drawout
3-12 BLK051010E
> 630 A Dimensions for 400mm Width offer
Overview
Device Horizontal Breaker Oper- Breaker Busbar & Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
Mounting Busbar Position ating Type Customer con- mm Cu- mm
Sin- Dou- X Y Z
gle ble
mm
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 600 3
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 200 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed / 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 600 4
Drawout
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 400 - 1000 3
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 400 - 600 3
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 200 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M 200 400 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 600 4
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 3
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 4
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 3
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 200 + 1000 3
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 4
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 200 + 600 3
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 4
700
X X Behind Door DRH/TOG Fixed 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 200 + 600 4
700
NS630b - X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 6 Rear 9M - 400 - 1000 3
1600 Door Drawout
Vertical
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 1000 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 7 Rear 9M - 400 - 600 3
Door Drawout
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 200 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 600 4
Door Drawout
Door Drawout
Door Drawout
Door Drawout
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 200 600 4
Door Drawout
BLK051010E 3-13
> 630 A
Overview
Sin- Dou- X Y Z
gle ble
mm
NS630b - X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M - 400 400 600 4
1600 Door
Vertical
X X Through DRH/TOG Drawout 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 600 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 200 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 400 - 1000 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 1000 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 400 - 600 3
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 200 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+4M 200 400 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/TOG Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 400 600 4
Door
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 600 4
Door Drawout
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 3
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 4
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 3
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 200 + 1000 3
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
3-14 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Sin- Dou- X Y Z
gle ble
mm
X X DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 1000 4
Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - 200 + 600 3
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 - 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
X X Through DRH/TOG Fixed/ 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 400 200 + 600 4
Door Drawout 700 or
200 +
400
ERH: Extended Rotary Handle

DRH: Direct Rotary Handle
Tog: Toggle
SF: Single Front architecture
DF: Double Front architecture
BLK051010E 3-15
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBAR CONNECTION
OPTION 1 Single Front connection Double Front connection
Option: Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Busbar Connection Flat Copper Busbar Linergy
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
600
9M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Busbar Connection Linergy
Type
Fixed Breakers
600
9M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
3-16 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Single Front connection Double Front connection

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
2 Page 1-57
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
Busbar Connection Linergy Behind door + ext. rotary
3a Type handle
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-17
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
3b Busbar Connection Linergy
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
3M
Depth 600 mm 600 nn

Type
Fixed Breakers
3M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
3M
3-18 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
4a Busbar Connection
Type
Linergy
Fixed Breakers
3M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4b Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
9M
3M
0
60
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
9M
0
60
3M
BLK051010E 3-19
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 1000 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b
Depth 1000 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection Behind door + ext rotary
Type handle (not possible)
7a Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
7b
3-20 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
7a
Busbar Connection Behind door + ext rotary
Type handle (not possible)
Fixed Breakers
Option:
7b
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8a Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-21
> 630 A
Overview
OPTION 1
Option: Single Front connection Double Front connection
Depth 600 mm
8b Busbar Connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
400
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
400
Option: Depth 600 mm

Busbar Connection
9
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
3-22 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Depth 600 mm
9 Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection
Type
10
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-23
> 630 A
Electrical Performance
Derating values - Natural ventilation
Compact NS
Installed in Horizontal
or Vertical position
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

NS630b 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 950 950
NS1250 1200 1150 1100 1050 1050 1025 1000 950
NS1600 1350 1325 1300 1250 1200 1150 1125 1100
These derated values are applicable both for bare copper or tin-coated copper circuits
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules in Assembly Guide.
IP42 is a solution with fan. For more details, refer drawing 51130469X0.
3-24 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

■ The NS1600b / NS2000 / NS2500 can be mounted in 900 mm in the D cubicle.
■ It accepts only one device.
The functional unit

■ Devices are of fixed type only, and are usually used as feeders.
instruments.
□ busbar
□ load
■ NS1600b to NS2500 cannot be use with configuration in 690 V.
Device Horizontal Breaker Operating Breaker Busbar & Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
busbar Position mechanism Type Customer connection mm mm
connection access
Single Double X Y Z
Type
NS1600b X X Through
Toggle Fixed 3a 9 Front/Rear 10M+4M 200 700 - 600 1
Door
NS2000 X X Through
Door
NS2500 X X Through
Door

BLK051010E 3-25
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 600 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option: Depth Single Front connection Double Front connection
Busbar Connection 600 mm
9
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-26 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Compact NS
Installed in Vertical
position
700
200
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

NS1600b 1600 1550 1500 1450
NS2000 2000 2000 2000 1950
NS2500 2350 2300 2200 2150
BLK051010E 3-27
Power Control Center ComPacT NS3200
> 630 A
Overview

■ The NS3200 can be mounted in four width possibilities 700 mm in the D cubicle.
The functional unit

■ Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, and are usually used as feeders.
instruments.
□ busbar
□ load
Device Horizontal Breaker Operating Breaker Busbar & Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
busbar Position mechanism Type Customer connection mm mm
connection access
Single Double X Y Z
Type
NS3200 X X Through 4M + 10M
Toggle Fixed 2 9 Front/Rear - 700 - 600 1
Door + 4M

BUSBARS CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
2 Type
Fixed Breakers
3-28 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION

Busbar Connection
9
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-29
> 630 A
Compact NS
Installed in Vertical
position
700
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

NS3200 2720 2650 2550 2450
3-30 BLK051010E
Power Control Center MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16
Electrical distribution NT06 to 16
> 630 A
Overview

■ The MTZ1 06/08/10/12/16, NT06/08/10/12/16 can be mounted in three width
possibilities of 700 mm, 900 mm and 1100 mm or in the D cubicle.
■ For MTZ1 10 / NT10, a maximum of three breakers can be mounted.
■ For MTZ1 12 and MTZ1 16 / NT12 and NT16, a maximum of two breakers can be
mounted.
The functional unit

■ Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, and can be used as incomers or
feeders.
instruments.
□ busbar
□ load
Device Horizontal busbar Bubsbar and Cus- Customer Modularity Width Right cubicle Depth Form
tomer connection Connection mm width mm
type access mm
Single Double X Y Z
MTZ1 06-16 X X 1 6 Rear 9M - 700 - - 1000 3

NT06-16
X X 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - - 1000 4
X X 1 7 Rear 9M - 700 - - 600 3
X X 1 7 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - - 600 4
X X 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 200 - 600 4
X X 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 700 - - 600 4
X X 2 6 Rear 9M - 700 - - 1000 3
X X 2 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - - 1000 4
X X 2 7 Rear 9M - 700 - - 600 3
X X 2 7 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - - 600 4
X X 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 200 - 600 4
X X 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 700 - - 600 4
X X 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 700 - - 1000 3
X X 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - - 1000 4
X X 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 700 - - 600 3
X X 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - - 600 4
X X 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 200 - 600 4
X X 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - - 600 4
X X 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - - 1000 3
X X 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - - 1000 4
X X 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 700 - - 600 3
X X 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - - 600 4
X X 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 200 - 600 4
X X 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 700 - - 600 4
X X 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200+700 1000 3
X X 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 1000 4

BLK051010E 3-31
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal busbar Bubsbar and Customer Modularity Width Right cubicle Depth Form
Customer Connection mm width mm
connection type access mm
Single Double X Y Z SF
MTZ1 06-16 X X 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M - 700 - 200+700 600 3
NT06-16
X X 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 600 4
X X 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 600 4
X X 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 1000 3
X X 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 1000 4
X X 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 600 3
X X 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 600 4
X X 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M - 700 - 200+700 600 4

3-32 BLK051010E
> 630 A 400mm Width offer
Overview

■ The MTZ1 06/08/10/12/16, NT06/08/10/12/16 can be mounted in frame width
possibilities of 400 mm, 600 mm, 800 mm or 1000 mm
■ It can accept PCC distribution feeders.
■ When connected in vertical position (MTZ1 10 / NT10) maximum of three or two
breakers can be mounted depending on connection type & Form.
■ For MTZ1 12 and MTZ1 16 / NT12 and NT16, a maximum of two breakers can be
mounted when connected in vertical position.
■ Thermoset support can be used only for HBB, Circuit breaker connections will be
using only Thermoplastic supports.
The functional unit

■ Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, and can be mounted in either a through/
behind door.
■ Used as Incomers only in single front architecture ( 600mm & 1000 mm depth).
■ Used as feeders in both single front architecture ( 600mm & 1000 mm depth) and
Double front architecture ( 1200mm depth).
■ 3P & 3P+N (PEN) incomers or feeders
□ busbar
□ load
■ Connection to the load can be done by cables, directly from the top or from the
rear.
■ Additional meatering compartment used to install auxiliaries or measuring
instruments.
■ Device derating values for W400 offer are same as standard MTZ1/NT06-16
derating values provided in the below section of this catalogue.
BLK051010E 3-33
> 630 A 400mm Width offer
Overview
Device Horizontal busbar Bubsbar and Cus- Customer Modularity Width Right cubicle Depth Form
tomer connection Connection mm width mm
type access mm
Single Double X Y Z
MTZ1 06-16 X X 1 6 Rear 9M - 400 - - 1000 3

NT06-16
X X 1 6 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - - 1000 4
X X 1 7 Rear 9M - 400 - - 600 3
X X 1 7 Rear 3M+9M - 400 - - 600 4
X X 1 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 200 - 600 4
X X 1 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M - 400 - - 600 4
X X 2 6 Rear 9M - 400 - - 1000 3
X X 2 6 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - - 1000 4
X X 2 7 Rear 9M - 400 - - 600 3
X X 2 7 Rear 9M+3M - 400 - - 600 4
X X 2 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 200 - 600 4
X X 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M - 400 - - 600 4
X X 3a 6 Rear 9M 200 400 - - 1000 3
X X 3a 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - - 1000 4
X X 3a 7 Rear 9M 200 400 - - 600 3
X X 3a 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - - 600 4
X X 3a 8b Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 200 - 600 4
X X 3a 9 Front/Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - - 600 4
X X 3b 6 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - - 1000 3
X X 3b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - - 1000 4
X X 3b 7 Rear 9M+3M 200 400 - - 600 3
X X 3b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - - 600 4
X X 3b 8a Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 200 - 600 4
X X 3b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 200 400 - - 600 4
X X 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M 400 200+400 or 1000 3
- -
200+700
X X 4a 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 1000 4
- -
200+700
X X 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M 400 200+400 or 600 3
- -
200+700
X X 4a 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 600 4
- -
200+700
X X 4a 9 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 600 4
- -
200+700
X X 4b 6 Rear 9M+3M 400 200+400 or 1000 3
- -
200+700
X X 4b 6 Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 1000 4
- -
200+700
X X 4b 7 Rear 9M+3M 400 200+400 or 600 3
- -
200+700
X X 4b 7 Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 600 4
- -
200+700
X X 4b 10 Front/Rear 3M+9M+3M 400 200+400 or 600 4
- -
200+700

3-34 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 600 mm 1200 mm
Busbar Connection Double front connection Page 1-57
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-35
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
2
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
3a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Type
Fixed Breakers
3-36 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-37
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
Linergy
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4b Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
9M
3M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
9M
3M
3-38 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 1000 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b
Depth 1000 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
7a Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
7b
BLK051010E 3-39
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
7a Type
Fixed Breakers
Option:
7b
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8a Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-40 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
OPTION 1
Depth 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection
9
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-41
> 630 A
Overview

Depth 600 mm
9 Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection
Type
10
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-42 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Masterpact
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ1 06/ NT06 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
MTZ1 08/ NT08 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
MTZ1 10/ NT10 1000 950 900 900 900 900 850 850
MTZ1 12/ NT12 1250 1250 1200 1150 1150 1100 1050 1000
MTZ1 16/ NT16 1400 1350 1300 1250 1250 1200 1150 1100
These derated values are applicable both for bare copper or tin-coated copper circuits.
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on Assembly Guide.
BLK051010E 3-43
Power Control Center MW2 Mix
Electrical distribution Mw2 and NT/NS/MTZ1 Mix, Mw2 and
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
Installation rules
Mw2 Mix
■ In this solution ACB incomer/feeder can be combined with MW2 feeders in a
cubicle.
■ This solution optimizes the footprint of a panel and can offer a competitive offer.
Benefits
Mw2 Mix offers following benefits
■ Copper Optimization
■ Footprint Optimization
■ Optimized area of installation
■ An answer to refurbishment projects requires space installation constraints
Markets
A new solution for large sites:
■ MMM
■ Mining, minerwals, metals, cement & glass industry
■ Oil & Gas
■ Refining, gas processing & petrochemical
3-44 BLK051010E
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
Mw2 and NT/NS/MTZ1 Mix
Installation Rules
■ MTZ1/NS/NT can be only withdrawable.
■ The cubicle can have only one MTZ1/NS/NT - 3P, 4P or 3P+N
■ The free area around device can be used to mount accessories.
■ The Functional unit cubicle width is 600 mm
■ Based on Cable compartment position cubicle footprint is defined
□ Side Connection – 600 + 400 mm width, 600 mm Depth
□ Rear Connection - 600 mm Width, 1000 mm Depth
■ This solution can be offered in Double Front, Seismic and Corrosive ambience
Functional Unit Dimension for NT/NS/MTZ1

Device Horizontal busbar Operating Mechanism Busbar and Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
Connection Connection mm mm
Type access
Single Double X Y Z
NS630b to ERH/DRH/Toggle/
X X 2 6 Rear 9M - 600 - 1000 4
1600A Electrical
NS630b to ERH/DRH/Toggle/
X X 2 8b Front 9M+4M - 600 400 600 4
1600A Electrical
NT/MTZ1 06
X X - 2 6 Rear 9M - 600 - 1000 4
to 16
NT/MTZ1 06
X X - 2 8b Front 9M+4M - 600 400 600 4
to 16
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Single Front Connection
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection Type
Withdrawable Breakers
4M SHBB
8M DHBB
9M
BLK051010E 3-45
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Depth 1000 mm
9M
1000 mm
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Depth 1000 mm
9M
4M
400mm
3-46 BLK051010E
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix

Modularity Information
a) Single HBB- Double HBB - Rear Connection

■ Copper Optimization
4M SHBB
8M DHBB ■ Footprint Optimization
■ Optimized area of installation
■ An answer to refurbishment projects requires space installation constraints
9M
25M SHBB
21M DHBB
b) Single HBB- Double HBB – Side Connection
4M SHBB
8M DHBB
9M
4M
21M SHBB
17M DHBB
BLK051010E 3-47
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix

Derating Current Values for Breaker- Bare and Tin Coated
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
No. of bars / phase Outside ambient temperature Outside ambient temperature
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
NT/MTZ1 06 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS630
NT/MTZ1 08 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS800
NT/MTZ1 10 1000 950 900 900 900 900 850 850
NS1000
NT/MTZ1 12 1250 1250 1200 1150 1150 1100 1050 1000
NS 1250
NT/MTZ1 16 1350 1310 1280 1250 1220 1200 1150 1100
NS 1600
These derating values are applicable for Bare and Tin Coated busbar.
Derating Current Values for Vertical Busbar – Mw2
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Double Vertical Busbar
2x 20 X 8 800 720 640 600 660 600 550 500
2x 30 X 8 1025 970 920 870 920 830 750 675
2x 40 X 8 1200 1140 1080 1020 1080 970 870 780
2x 50 X 8 1350 1280 1220 1160 1220 1100 1000 900
Single Vertical Busbar
20 X 8 400 360 330 300 330 300 270 250
30 X 8 630 580 530 480 560 510 450 400
40 X 8 800 730 670 610 710 650 580 510
50 X 8 950 870 800 740 820 750 690 630
60 X 8 1050 960 880 810 900 830 760 700
3-48 BLK051010E
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
Mw2 and NW/MTZ2 Mix

Installation Rules
■ MTZ2/NW can be only withdrawable.
■ The cubicle can have only one MTZ2/NW 3P or 3P+N.
■ The free area around device can be used to mount accessories.
■ The Functional unit cubicle width is 600 mm
■ Based on Cable compartment position cubicle footprint is defined
□ Rear Connection - 600 mm Width, 1000 mm Depth.
■ This solution cannot be offered in Double Front however it can be offered in
Seismic and Corrosive ambience
Functional Unit Dimension for MTZ2/NW

Device Horizontal busbar Busbar and Customer Connection Modularity Width (mm) Depth Form
Connection Type access mm
Single Double X Y Z
NW X X 2 6 Rear 12 - 600 - 1000 4
BLK051010E 3-49
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
Mw2 and NW/MTZ2 Mix
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Depth 600 mm
4M SHBB
8M DHBB
12M
BUSBAR CONNECTION
Depth 1000 mm
12M
1000 mm
3-50 BLK051010E
> 630 A NW/MTZ2 Mix
Mw2 and NW/MTZ2 Mix

Modularity Information
4M SHBB
8M DHBB
12M
3M DVBB, 2M SVBB
HBB VBB Modularity
Single Single 20M

Single Double 19M
Double Single 17M
Double Double 16M
Derating Values for Breaker IP ≤ 42 IP 54

35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
NW/MTZ2 08 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NW/MTZ2 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW/MTZ2 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW/MTZ2 16 1550 1550 1450 1400 1400 1350 1300 1250
NW/MTZ2 20 1900 1835 1750 1700 1800 1750 1650 1600
NW/MTZ2 25 2050 1985 1900 1835 2000 1940 1850 1790
These derating values are applicable for Bare and Tin Coated busbar.
Derating Values for Vertical Busbar – Mw2 IP ≤ 42 IP 54

35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Double Vertical Busbar
2x 20 X 8 800 720 640 600 660 600 550 500
2x 30 X 8 1025 970 920 870 920 830 750 675
2x 40 X 8 1200 1140 1080 1020 1080 970 870 780
2x 50 X 8 1350 1280 1220 1160 1220 1100 1000 900
Single Vertical Busbar
20 X 8 400 360 330 300 330 300 270 250
30 X 8 630 580 530 480 560 510 450 400
40 X 8 800 730 670 610 710 650 580 510
50 X 8 950 870 800 740 820 750 690 630
60 X 8 1050 960 880 810 900 830 760 700
BLK051010E 3-51
Electrical distribution NW08 to 16
> 630 A
Overview

■ The MTZ2 08/10/12/16 and NW08/10/12/16 can be mounted in four possible
widths of 700 mm, 900 mm, 1100 mm or 1300 mm in the D cubicle.
■ It accepts a maximum of 3 devices.
The functional unit

feeders.
instruments.
□ busbar
□ load
Device Horizontal busbar Breaker Type Busbar and Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
Customer Connection mm cubicle mm
connection access width
Single Double DF X Y Z SF DF
type mm
MTZ2 X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 6 Rear 12M - 700 - 1000 - 4
08-16
X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 7 Rear 12M - 700 - 600 - 4
NW
06-16
X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 4M+12M - 700 200 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M - 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 4M+12M - 700 - 600 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 6 Rear 12M - 700 - 1000 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 8b Front/Rear 12M+4M - 700 200 600 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 8c Front/Rear 12M+6M - 700 400 600 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 9 Front/Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 2 8b Front/Rear 12M+4M - 700 200 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 2 8c Front/Rear 12M+6M - 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 6 Rear 12M 200 700 - 1000 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 7 Rear 12M 200 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 12M+4M 200 700 200 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8c Front/Rear 12M+6M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 9 Front/Rear 12M+4M 200 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 6 Rear 12M+4M 200 700 - 1000 - 4

3-52 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal busbar Breaker Type Busbar Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
and Cus- Connection mm cubicle mm
tomer access width
connection mm
type
MTZ2 X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 8a Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M 200 700 200 600 - 4
08 -16
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 8a Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4
NW 06
-16 X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 10 Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M 200 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4a 6 Rear 4M+12M - 700 - 200+700 1000 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4a 8c Front/Rear 4M+12M+6M - 700 400 200+700 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4a 9 Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 6 Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 1000 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 7 Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 400 200+700 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 10 Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 600 - 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 1 6 Rear 12M+24M - 700 - - 1200 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 1 8a Front 4M+12M+20M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Fixed 1 8d Front 4M+12M+20M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Drawout 1 8d Front 6M+12M+18M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 4M+12M+20M - 700 - - 1200 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 2 8b Front 12M+4M+20M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 2 8c Front 12M+6M+18M - 700 400 - 1200 4

BLK051010E 3-53
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Option: Depth 600 mm 1200
Busbar Connection Page 1-57
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Busbar Connection Double Front connection
Type
Fixed Breakers

Option:
Busbar Connection Front connection Double Front connection
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
3-54 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm 1200 mm
Busbar Connection Front connection
Type
2
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
3a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-55
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
12 M (b)
4M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
4M
12 M (b)
3-56 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
Linergy
Fixed Breakers
4M
(b)
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Option:
4b Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
12 M (b)
4M
0
60
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Type
Fixed Breakers
12 M (b)
4M
0
60
BLK051010E 3-57
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b

Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
7a Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
7b
600
3-58 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
7a
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Option:
7b
600
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8a Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-59
> 630 A
Overview
OPTION 1
Option: Single Front connection
Depth 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8c Withdrawable
Breakers
3-60 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Single Front connection

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
8c Type
Fixed Breakers
Single Front connection

Busbar Connection
8d Type
600
Withdrawable
Breakers
3M
9M
Fixed Breakers 600
3M
9M

Busbar Connection
9 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-61
> 630 A
Overview

Busbar Connection
9 Type
Fixed Breakers
OPTION 1
Depth 600 mm
10 Busbar Connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-62 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Masterpact
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ2 08/NW08 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
MTZ2 10/NW10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ2 12/NW12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1150
MTZ2 16/NW16 1550 1500 1450 1400 1400 1350 1300 1250
BLK051010E 3-63
> 630 A
Overview
Installation rules
The cubicle
■ The MTZ2 20/25 / NW20/25 can be mounted in four possible widths of 700 mm,
900 mm, 1100 mm or 1300 mm in the D cubicle.
■ It accepts a maximum of two devices.
The functional unit

feeders.
instruments.
type mm
MTZ2 X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 6 Rear 12M - 700 - 1000 - 4
20-25
NW20-
25
X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M - 700 400 600 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 8c Front/Rear 12M+6M - 700 400 600 - 4
X - - Fixed/Drawout 2a 9 Front/Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 2 8c Front/Rear 12M+6M - 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 6 Rear 4M*+12M 200 700 - 1000 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 4M*+12M+4M 200 700 200 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 4M*+12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8c Front/Rear 4M*+12M+6M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 9 Front/Rear 4M*+12M+4M 200 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3b 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4

3-64 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal busbar Breaker Type Busbar Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
and Cus- Connection mm cubicle mm
tomer access width
connection mm
type
MTZ2 X X - Fixed/Drawout 4a 8c Front/Rear 4M+12M+6M - 700 400 200+700 600 - 4
20-25
NW20-
25 X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 6 Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 1000 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 8d Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 400 200+700 600 - 4
- - X Fixed 1 8d Front 4M+12M+20M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Drawout 1 8d Front 6M+12M+18M - 700 400 - 1200 4
- - X Fixed/Drawout 2 8c Front 12M+6M+18M - 700 400 - 1200 4

* 4M additional module required only for NW25
BLK051010E 3-65
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Page 1-57
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Type
Fixed Breakers

Option:
Busbar Connection Rear connection Front connection Double Front connection
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
3-66 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Busbar Connection Front connection
2 Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
3a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-67
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection Without current
Type transformer
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
4a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
3-68 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
4b Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
0
60
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
0
60
BLK051010E 3-69
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b
Depth 1000 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8a Withdrawable
Breakers
3-70 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
8a Type
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection
8b
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-71
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 1200 mm
8c Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 1200 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
8d Busbar Connection Type

600
Withdrawable
Breakers
4M
12 M
Fixed Breakers 600
4M
12 M
3-72 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
Busbar Connection
9 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Depth 600 mm
9 Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
BLK051010E 3-73
> 630 A
Overview

Busbar Connection
Type
10
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-74 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Masterpact
Current in A
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ2 20/NW20 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1750 1700 1600
MTZ2 25/NW25 2350 2300 2200 2150 2050 2000 1950 1900
BLK051010E 3-75
Power Control Center MasterPact MTZ2 32 / NW32
> 630 A
Overview
Installation rules
The cubicle
■ The MTZ2 32/NW32 can be mounted in four possible widths of 700 mm,
900 mm, 1100 mm or 1300 mm in the D cubicle.
The functional unit

feeders.
instruments.
type mm
MTZ2 X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 8a Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 400 600 - 4
32
NW32 X X - Fixed/Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 2 8b Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 2 9 Front/Rear 4M+12M+4M - 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 8b Front/Rear 6M+12M+4M 200 700 400 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 3a 9 Front/Rear 6M+12M+4M 200 700 - 600 - 4
X X - Fixed/Drawout 4b 6 Rear 12M+4M - 700 - 200+700 - 1200 4

3-76 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Busbar Connection
Page 1-57
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Type
Fixed Breakers

Option:
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-77
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
2 Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
3a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
6M
12M
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-78 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
4a Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-79
> 630 A
Overview

Option:
Depth 600 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
v Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
4b
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
0
60
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
0
60
3-80 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b
Depth 1000 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Option:
Busbar Connection
Type
8a Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-81
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
8a Type
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection
8b
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-82 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

Depth 600 mm
9 Busbar Connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth 600 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Fixed Breakers
Busbar Connection
10
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-83
> 630 A
Overview

Depth 600 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-84 BLK051010E
> 630 A
MTZ2 32/NW32
Depth 700
Current in A
T°amb(°C) IP Ambient temp (ºC) Depth (mm)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 600 1000 1200D

MTZ2 32/NW32 IP ≤ 42 3050 2950 2800 2650 X X
MTZ2 32/NW32 IP54 2850 2750 2650 2500 X X
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on chapter 6.6 of Assembly Guide in ESMS version 2015.
BLK051010E 3-85
> 630 A
Overview
Installation rules
The cubicle
■ The MTZ2 40/NW40 can be mounted in a possible width of 700 mm in the D
cubicle.
■ Accepts only one device.
The functional unit

feeders.
instruments.
Device Horizontal busbar Connection type Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
connection mm mm
Busbar Customer access
Connection Connection
X - 1 10 Front 13M+12M+11M - 700 - 600 - 4
MTZ2 40
X - 1 10 Rear 13M+12M+11M - 700 - 1000 - 4
NW40
- X 1 10 Front 9M+12M+11M - 700 - 600 - 4
- X 1 10 Rear 9M+12M+11M - 700 - 1000 - 4

X - 2 9 Front 9M+12M+15M - 700 - 600 - 4
X - 2 9 Rear 9M+12M+15M - 700 - 1000 - 4
- X 2 9 Front 9M+12M+11M - 700 - 600 - 4
- X 2 9 Rear 9M+12M+11M - 700 - 1000 - 4
- - X 2 6 Rear 9M+12M+15M - 700 - - 1200 4

- - X 2 9 Front/Rear 9M+12M+15M - 700 - - 1200 4
- - X 1 6 Rear 13M+12M+11M - 700 - - 1200 4
- - X 1 10 Front/Rear 13M+12M+11M - 700 - - 1200 4

3-86 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Busbar Connection Page 1-57
1 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers

Type
Fixed Breakers

Option:
Busbar Connection With current transformer Double Front connection
Type
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
4M
9M
12 M
BLK051010E 3-87
> 630 A
Overview

Type
Fixed Breakers
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Double Front connection
Option:
Depth 1000 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Option:
6b
Depth Double Front connection

Busbar Connection 1200 mm
Type
Fixed Breakers
3-88 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
OPTION 1
9 Busbar Connection
Type
Without current
transformer
With current transformer Force ventilation
Withdrawable
Breakers
12 M
15 M
Depth 600 mm 600 mm

Busbar Connection Without current With current transformer
Type transformer
Fixed Breakers

Busbar Connection Without current With current transformer
Type transformer
10
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-89
> 630 A
Overview

Depth 600 mm 600 mm
Type
Without current
transformer
With current transformer
Fixed Breakers
3-90 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Derating values - Natural and Forced ventilation
MTZ2 40/NW40
Depth 700
Current in A
T°amb(°C) IP Ambient temp (ºC) Depth (mm) Accessories

Radiator Fan Rear
door (1)
compulsory
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 600 1000 1200
MTZ2 40/NW40 IP≤42 3430 3320 3220 3120 X X X (No accessory)
MTZ2 40/NW40 IP54 3135 3050 2980 - X X X (No accessory)
(2) IP≤31 3550 3450 3350 3300 - X X X - X(4)
MTZ2 40/NW40
(2) IP 42/54 3550 3450 3350 3200 - X X X X(3) X(5)
MTZ2 40/NW40
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules of Assembly Guide.
(1) Refer to the assembly drawing 51127696 (1000 mm depth), EAV36310 (1200 mm depth).
(2) Configuration with optimized derating values.
(3) Schneider fan and grill ref. NSYCVF560M + NSYCAG291LPF - refer drawing 51127696.
(4) Refer drawing 51131068
(5) Refer drawing 51131067
BLK051010E 3-91
> 630 A
Derating values - Forced ventilation
MTZ2 40/MVS40/NW40
Fans (1)
Depth 700
Current in A
T°amb(°C) IP ACB Terminal Linkbar Ambient temp (ºC) Depth Accessories

Cross Section 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C (mm) Fan (1) Grille
IP≤31 - - 4000 4000 x -

IP≤42 6b 125*5 4000 4000 4000 3850 x -
IP≤54 3700 3570 3440 3300 x x
MTZ2 40/NW40 600/1000
IP≤31 4000 4000 3850 3700 x -
IP≤42 5b 125*5 3900 3800 3650 3500 x -
IP≤54 3550 3400 3300 3150 x x
Notes:
Fans Airflow must > 980 CFM / 50HZ 1200CFM/60HZ with no resistance
or >764 CFM/50HZ 936CFM/60HZ with filter
Fans use external power supply.
Fans IP level covers IP54.
3-92 BLK051010E
Power Control Center Masterpact MTZ2 40/NW40
Electrical distribution 4000A/3650A
> 630 A
Overview
The cubicle
■ The MTZ2 40/NW40 can be mounted in a possible width of 700 mm in the D
cubicle.
■ Use special ventilation roof and ACB terminals.
The functional unit

■ Devices are only withdrawable,and can be used as incomers or feeders.
□ by cables, directly from the rear.
□ or by busbar trunking, directly from the top.
Device Horizontal busbar Connection type Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
connection mm mm
access
Single Double Double Busbar Customer X Y Z SF DF
HBB HBB front connection connection
MTZ2 40 X - - 1 6 Rear 8+12+12 - 700 - 1000 - 4
NW40
X - - 1 10 Front 8+12+12 - 700 - 1000 - 4
- X - 1 6 Rear 12+12+8 - 700 - 1000 - 4
- X - 1 10 Front 12+12+8 - 700 - 1000 - 4

- - X 1 6 Rear 9+12+11 - 700 - - 1200 4
X - - 2 6 Rear 11+12+13 - 700 - 1000 - 4
X - - 2 9 Front 11+12+13 - 700 - 1000 - 4
- X - 2 6 Rear 11+12+9 - 700 - 1000 - 4
- X - 2 9 Front 11+12+9 - 700 - 1000 - 4
- - X 2 6 Rear 7+12+13 - 700 - - 1200 4

BLK051010E 3-93
> 630 A
Overview
BUSBARS CONNECTION
OPTION 1 Single front single Single Front connection Double Front connection
Option: HBB connection
Depth 1000 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm Page 1-57
1 Busbar
Connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth Single front single Single front double HBB Double Front connection
Option: HBB connection connection
Busbar 1000 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm
Connection
2 Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
3-94 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Single front single HBB Double Front connection
Option: connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Depth Single front connection Double Front connection

Option: Busbar Connection 1000 mm 1200 mm
6b
Type
Withdrawable
breakers
Option: Single front single HBB

connection
9
Depth 1000 mm
Busbar Connection
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-95
> 630 A
Overview
Single front connection

Option:
Depth 1000 mm
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
Derating values
Masterpact MTZ2
40/NW40
Depth 700
T°amb(°C) IP Ambient temp (ºC) Depth (mm) Accessories

Radiator Fan Rear door
compulsory
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 1200 1000
MTZ2 40/NW40 4000A IP≤42 4000 4000 3800 3600 X X X - -
MTZ2 40/NW40 3650A IP≤42 3750 3650 3550 3480 X X X - -
3-96 BLK051010E
Electrical distribution NW40b to 63
> 630 A
Overview
600
BUSBARS CONNECTION
Option:
Busbar Connection Connected to simple Connected to double Page 1-57
1 Type busbar busbar
Withdrawable
Breakers

Option:
Busbar Connection Connected to simple Connected to double Double Front connection
Type busbar busbar
2 Withdrawable
Breakers
BLK051010E 3-97
> 630 A
Overview
CUSTOMER CONNECTION
Option:
Depth 600 mm 600 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm
9 Busbar Without current With current transformer Without current With current transformer
Connection transformer transforme
Type
Withdrawable
Breakers
17 M 17
Option: Depth 600 mm 600 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm

Busbar Without current With current transformer Without current With current transformer
10 Connection
Type
transformer transforme
Withdrawable
Breakers
17
17
3-98 BLK051010E
> 630 A
Overview

■ The MTZ3 40/50/63 / NW40b/50/63, can be mounted in an exclusive width of 1200
mm in the D cubicle.
PD405068

■ Is always stand alone.
The functional unit

■ Devices are withdrawable, and can be used as incomers or feeders.
instruments.
Devicec Horizontal busbar Busbar Customer Modularity Width Depth Form

and Customer connection mm mm
connection type access
MTZ3 40 X - - 1 10 Front 16M+13M+11M - 1200 - 600 - 4

NW40b
- X - 1 10 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
X - - 1 10 Front/Rear 16M+13M+11M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- X - 1 10 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4

- - X 1 10 Front/Rear 16M+13M+11M 1200 - - 1200 4
X - - 2 9 Front 10M+13M+17M - 1200 - 600 - 4
- X - 2 9 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
X - - 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+17M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- X - 2 9 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4

- - X 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+17M - 1200 - - 1200 4
MTZ3 50 - X - 1 10 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
NW50
- X - 1 10 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- - X 1 10 Front/Rear 16M+13M+11M - 1200 - - 1200 4
- X - 2 9 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
- X - 2 9 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- - X 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+17M - 1200 - - 1200 4

BLK051010E 3-99
> 630 A
Overview
Device Horizontal busbar Busbar and Customer Modularity Width Depth Form
Customer connection mm mm
connection type access
MTZ3 63 - X - 1 10 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
NW63
- X - 1 10 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- - X 1 10 Front/Rear 13M+13M+11M 1200 - - 1200 4
- X - 2 9 Front 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 600 - 4
- X - 2 9 Front/Rear 13M+13M+14M - 1200 - 1000 - 4
- - X 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+17M - 1200 - - 1200 4

3-100 BLK051010E
> 630 A
MTZ3 40 / MTZ3 50 / MTZ3 63

3/4P
NW40b / NW50 / NW63
3/4P
Fan see drawing 51132529X0
600 1200
T°amb (°C)
IP ≤ 31 IP 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
MTZ3 40/NW40b 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 3850 3700 3550 4000 3850 3700 3550
MTZ3 50/NW50 5000 5000 5000 4900 4800 4600 4300 4000 4600 4450 4200 3900
MTZ3 63/NW63 5650 5450 5300 5100 5200 5050 4850 4650 4900 4750 4500 4200
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules of Assembly Guide.
Fan ref. NSYCVF165M.
BLK051010E 3-101
> 630 A
MTZ3 40 / MTZ3 50 / MTZ3 63

3/4P
NW40b / NW50 / NW63
3/4P
See drawing 51131079X0 (drawing GEX2385702 for MTZ3 50/NW50 4000A solution）
See drawing EAV36312 (double front) NW40b/MTZ3 40 NW63/MTZ3 63
See drawing GEX23026 (double front) NW50/MTZ3 50
1000/1200 1200
Current in A
T°amb (°C) Accessories
IP ≤ 31 Rear panel or door Plain rear panel
with holes IP31 or door IP20
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
MTZ3 40/NW40b 4000 4000 4000 3900 X X
MTZ3 50/NW50 5000 5000 4940 4800 X X
MTZ3 63/NW63 5500 5360 5200 5030 X X

IP 42 Rear panel or Plain rear panel
door with holes or door
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
MTZ3 40/NW40b 3950 3850 3760 3670 - X
MTZ3 50/NW50 4860 4760 4650 4540 - X
MTZ3 50/NW 50 (1) 4860 4760 4650 4540 X -
MTZ3 63/NW63 5220 5100 4990 4890 - X

IP 54 Rear panel or Plain rear panel With grille
door with holes or door
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
MTZ3 40/NW40b 3870 3790 3700 3670 - X -
MTZ3 50/NW 50 (2) 4380 4250 4130 4000 - - X
MTZ3 50/NW 50 (3) 4380 4250 4130 4000 - X -
MTZ3 50/NW50 4780 4680 4580 4470 - X -
MTZ3 63/NW63 4900 4800 4680 4570 - X -
In a switchboard this column does not need ventilation in IP42. The adjacent columns must
be ventilated according to the Assembly Guide for carrying out the IP.
Note:
1) For double front
2) Single Front 4000A thermoset solution, saved more cooper, select from table 10-116/120/126/127/132/133,table 23-18
3) Double Front 4000A thermoset solution, saved more cooper, select from table 10-54/61, table 23-11/17
3-102 BLK051010E
> 630 A
7ZRIDQVLQUHDUSRVLWLRQ
UHI16<&9)03)
7ZRYHQWLODWLRQJULOOV
LQIURQWSRVLWLRQ
UHI16<&$*/3)
6HHGUDZLQJV
+5% VLQJOHIURQW
*(; GRXEOHIURQW
07=1:
1+$ GRXEOHIURQW
07=E1:E
7ZRYHQWLODWLRQJULOOV

LQIURQWSRVLWLRQ
UHI16<&$*/3)
07=07= 07=
1:1: 1:E
Current in A
IP ≤ 31 Rear panelwith 2 fans Front door with two grills
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ3 40/NW40b 4000 4000 4000 4000 X X
MTZ3 50/NW50 5000 5000 5000 5000 X X
MTZ3 63/NW63 6000 6000 6000 6000 X X

IP 42 Rear panelwith 2 fans Front door with two grills
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ3 40/NW40b 4000 4000 4000 4000 X X
MTZ3 50/NW50 5000 5000 5000 5000 X X
MTZ3 63/NW63 5500 5400 5300 5200 X X

IP 54 Rear panelwith 2 fans Front door with two grills
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

MTZ3 40/NW40b 4000 4000 4000 4000 X X
MTZ3 50/NW50 5000 5000 5000 5000 X X
MTZ3 63/NW63 5500 5400 5300 5200 X X
In a switchboard IP42, the adjacent columns must be ventilated according to the Assembly Guide for carrying out the IP.
Note: Depth of 1200 mm applicable for double front only.
BLK051010E 3-103
Power Control Center I-Line II copper busway
Electrical distribution MTZ1 08-16/NT08-16/NS800-1600
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63
Installation rules Cubicle

In a D cubicle:
■ The circuit breakers MTZ1 08-16/NT08-16/NS800-1600 MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3
63/NW63 can be mounted in column width as mentioned in below table.
■ Only one circuit breaker can be mounted.
Functional Unit
The functional unit comprises of:
■ The circuit breaker only withdrawable, and can be used as incomers or feeders.
■ The free area around the circuit breaker that can be used to install auxiliaries or
measuring instruments.
■ In the functional unit, connection to the load to be done by busway, directly with
top busduct entry from the rear.

Device Circuit Option Customer Modularity Width Horizontal Poles Depth IP
Breaker Type Connection mm Busbar mm
Access connection type
X Y Z
MTZ1 08 -12 Drawout 1+10+11a Rear-Top 9+3+24 - 700 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 600/1000 IP54
NT08 -12 busway
NS800-1200 - 700 - 4P 600/1000
2+6+11b 9 - 700 - 3P/3P+N 1000
- 700 - 4P 1000
MTZ1 16 Drawout 1+10+11a Rear-Top 9+3+24 - 700 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 600/1000 IP54
NT16 busway
NS1600 - 700 - 4P 600/1000
2+6+11b 9 - 700 - 3P/3P+N 1000
- 700 - 4P 1000
MTZ2 08 -12 Drawout 1+10+11a Rear-Top 12+3+21 - 700 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 600/1000 IP54
NW08 -12 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
1+6+11a 12+21 - 700 - Double Front 3P/3P+N 1200
- 700 - 4P 1200
2+6+11b 12 - 700 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 1000
- 700 - 4P 1000
NW 16 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
- 700 - 4P 1200
- 700 - 4P 1000
NW 20 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
- 700 - 4P 1200
- 700 - 4P 1000
3-104 BLK051010E
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63
Device Circuit Option Customer Modularity Width Horizontal Poles Depth IP

Breaker Type Connection mm Busbar mm
Access connection type
X Y Z
NW 25 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
- 700 - 4P 1200
- 700 - 4P 1000
NW 32 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
- 700 - 4P 1200
NW 40 busway
- 700 - 4P 600/1000
1+6+11a 13+12+13 - 700 - Double Front 3P/3P+N 1200
- 700 - 4P 1200
MTZ2 40/ Drawout 1+6+11a Rear-Top 8+12+12 - 700 - Single front 3P/3P+N 1200 IP42
NW40 busway single HBB
4000A/ - 700 - 4P 1200
3650A 1+6+11a 12+12+8 - 700 - Single front 3P/3P+N 1200
double HBB
- 700 - 4P 1200
1+6+11a 8+12+12 - 700 - Double front 3P/3P+N 1200
- 700 - 4P 1200
MTZ2 40/ Drawout 1+6+11a Rear-Top 8+12+12 - 700 - Single front 3P/3P+N 1200 IP42
NW40 busway single HBB
4000A/ - 700 - 4P 1200
3650A 1+6+11a 12+12+8 - 700 - Single front 3P/3P+N 1200
double HBB
- 700 - 4P 1200
1+6+11a 8+12+12 - 700 - Double front 3P/3P+N 1200
- 700 - 4P 1200
MTZ3 40b Drawout 1+11a Rear-Top 13+13+16 - 1200 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 600/1000 IP54
NW 40b busway
- 1200 - 4P 600/1000
- 1200 - 4P 1200
MTZ3 50-63 Drawout 1+11a Rear-Top 13+13+14 - 1200 - Single Front 3P/3P+N 600/1000 IP54
NW 50 -63 busway
- 1200 - 4P 600/1000
- 1200 - 4P 1200
BLK051010E 3-105
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63
Example for busbar and customer connection

OPTION Single Front connection Double Front connection
600/1000 mm 1200 mm
Withdrawable Breaker Withdrawable Breaker
MTZ1 08 -16 N/A
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
Option:
11a
MTZ1 08 -16 N/A

NT08 -16
NS800-1600
Option: 11b
3-106 BLK051010E
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ2 08 -16
NW08 -16
Option:
11a
MTZ2 08 -16
NW08 -16
Option:
11a
BLK051010E 3-107
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ1 08 -16 N/A
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
Option: 11b
MTZ2 20-25
NW 20-25
Option:
11a
3-108 BLK051010E
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ2 20-25 N/A
NW 20-25
Option: 11b
MTZ2 32
NW 32
Option:
11a
BLK051010E 3-109
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ2 40
NW 40
Option:
11a
MTZ240
NW40
4000a/
3650A
Option:
11a
3-110 BLK051010E
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ3 40
NW 40b
Option:
11a

600/1000 mm 1200 mm
MTZ3 50 / NW 50
MTZ3 63 / NW 63 1+11a 1+6+11a 1+11a
Option:
11a
BLK051010E 3-111
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63
Busway derating as per busway catalogue BlokSeT Panel derating

I-LineII Copper busway Amb Temp. (Current in A) Breaker rating Amb Temp. (Current in A) IP
flanged end
35° C / 45° C 50° C 35° C 40° C 45° C 50° C
40° C
CFD2308G**FE*M** / 800 760 720 MTZ1 08/ 800 800 800 800 IP≤42
CFD2508G**FE*M** NT08/
NS800
CFD2310G**FE*M** / 1000 950 900 IP54
CFD2510G**FE*M**
CFD2310G**FE*M** / 1000 950 900 MTZ1 10/ 1000 1000 1000 1000 IP≤42
NS1000
CFD2312G**FE*M** / 1250 1187.5 1125 1000 1000 950 950 IP54
CFD2512G**FE*M**
CFD2312G**FE*M** / 1250 1187.5 1125 MTZ1 12/ 1200 1150 1050 1050 IP≤42
NS1200
CFD2313G**FE*M** / 1350 1282.5 1215 1050 1025 1000 950 IP54
CFD2513G**FE*M**
CFD2313G**FE*M** / 1350 1282.5 1215 MTZ1 16/ 1350 1325 1300 1250 IP≤42
NS1600
CFD2316G**FE*M** / 1600 1520 1440 1200 1150 1125 1100 IP54
CFD2516G**FE*M**
CFD2308G**FE*M** / 800 760 720 MTZ2 08 / 800 800 800 800 IP≤42
CFD2508G**FE*M** NW08
CFD2310G**FE*M** / 1000 950 900 IP54
CFD2510G**FE*M**
CFD2310G**FE*M** / 1000 950 900 MTZ2 10 / 1000 1000 1000 1000 IP≤42
CFD2312G**FE*M** / 1250 1187.5 1125 IP54
CFD2512G**FE*M**
CFD2312G**FE*M** / 1250 1187.5 1125 MTZ2 12 / 1250 1250 1250 1250 IP≤42
CFD2313G**FE*M** / 1350 1282.5 1215 IP54
CFD2513G**FE*M**
CFD2313G**FE*M** / 1350 1282.5 1215 MTZ2 16 / 1550 1550 1450 1400 IP≤42
CFD2316G**FE*M** / 1600 1520 1440 1400 1350 1300 1250 IP54
CFD2516G**FE*M**
CFD2320G**FE*M** / 2000 1900 1800 MTZ2 20 / 2000 2000 2000 1900 IP≤42
CFD2325G**FE*M** / 2500 2375 2250 1800 1750 1700 1600 IP54
CFD2525G**FE*M**
CFD2320G**FE*M** / 2000 1900 1800 MTZ2 25 / 2350 2300 2200 2150 IP≤42
CFD2325G**FE*M** / 2500 2375 2250 2050 2000 1950 1900 IP54
CFD2525G**FE*M**
CFD2325G**FE*M** / 2500 2375 2250 MTZ2 32 / 3050 2950 2800 2650 IP≤42
CFD2332G**FE*M** / 3200 3040 2880 2850 2750 2650 2500 IP54
CFD2532G**FE*M**
CFD2332G**FE*M** / 3200 3040 2880 MTZ2 40(1)/ 3430 3320 3220 3120 IP≤42
CFD2532G**FE*M** NW40(1)
CFD2340G**FE*M** / 4000 3800 3600 3135 3050 2980 - IP54
CFD2540G**FE*M**
CFD2332G**FE*M** / 3200 3040 2880 MTZ2 40(2)/ 3550 3450 3350 3300 IP≤42
CFD2532G**FE*M** NW40(2)
CFD2340G**FE*M** / 4000 3800 3600 3550 3450 3350 3200 IP54
CFD2540G**FE*M**
CFD2340G**FE*M** / 4000 3800 3600 MTZ2 40(3)/ 4000 4000 3800 3600 IP≤42
CFD2540G**FE*M** NW40(3)
CFD2340G**FE*M** / 4000 3800 3600 MTZ2 40(7)/ 3750 3650 3550 3480 IP≤42
CFD2540G**FE*M** NW40(7)
3-112 BLK051010E
> 630 A MTZ2 08/NW08 to MTZ3 63/NW63
Busway derating as per busway catalogue BlokSeT Panel derating

I-LineII Copper busway Amb Temp. (Current in A) Breaker rating Amb Temp. (Current in A) IP
flanged end
35° C / 45° C 50° C 35° C 40° C 45° C 50° C
40° C
CFD2340G**FE*M** / 4000 3800 3600 MTZ3 40 / 4000 4000 4000 3900 IP≤31
CFD2540G**FE*M** NW40b
3950 3850 3760 3760 IP42
CFD2350G**FE*M** / 5000 4750 4500 3870 3790 3700 3670 IP54
CFD2550G**FE*M**
CFD2350G**FE*M** / 5000 4750 4500 MTZ3 50/ 5000 5000 4940 4800 IP≤31
CFD2563G**FE*M** 6300 5985 5670 4860 4760 4650 4540 IP42
4780 4680 4580 4470 IP54
4380 4250 4130 4000 IP54(7)
CFD2350G**FE*M** / 5000 4750 4500 MTZ3 63 / 5500 5360 5200 5030 IP≤31
CFD2563G**FE*M** 6300 5985 5670 5220 5100 4990 4890 IP42
4900 4800 4680 4570 IP54
Note:
1) For NW40 600/1000 depth without radiator and fans.
2) For NW40 1000 depth with radiator and fans.
3) For NW40 4000A offer.
4) For each BlokSeT panel rating, choice is given to select 2 nearby ratings of I -line II busway based on current rating and ambient
temp.
5) First step is to select the busway current rating and ambient temperature based on transformer rating and second step is to
select the corresponding BlokSeT panel rating for the same ambient temperature.
6) Refer busway fault level- kA rating from I-LineII busway catalogue.
7) Cooper saving solution
BLK051010E 3-113
Notes
BLK051010E
< 630 A
Technical description 4-2

Types of functional units 4-2
Feeders 4-3
Selection of functional unit 4-4
Panorama of configurations 4-6

D cubicle 4-6
iC60 4-7
D cubicle 4-7
NSX100-630 / NSXm100-160 4-8

D cubicle 4-8
Panorama of configurations 4-9
Mw2 drawer 4-9
iC60 4-10
NSX100-630 / NSXm100-160 4-10

Mw2 drawer 4-10
Operating Mechanisms 4-13
Outgoing cables connection layout & connection

method 4-14
iC60 4-15
ComPacT NSX100 to 630 NSXm100-160 4-16
ComPacT NSXm 4-18

Selection table 4-18
MCCB Direct Tapping to HBB 4-36
BLK052010E 4-1
Power Control Center Technical description
Electrical distribution Types of functional units
< 630 A
Overview
Fixed FU
b The fixed PCC mounting plates have been designed for installing non-essential
functional units.
b The plug-in version makes it possible to:
v extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch the
connections on the base
v allow for the addition of future circuits by installing bases that will be equipped
with a circuit breaker at a later date
b The fixed PCC mounting plates allow MCCB feeders to be used, with or without
Vigi module, fixed or base-mounted.
b The devices are connected directly to the vertical busbar by flexible screwed
connections or solid bars.
b The customer’s load can be connected in the feeders in the cable chamber,
through the intermediate terminal block or by solid bars.
Withdrawable FU in drawer
b The withdrawable drawer is used in a huge range of electrical distribution
Functional Units, up to 630 A.
The drawer is used to make up a Functional Unit consisting of several
mechanically attached devices, that can assume the “plug-in / test / drawout
/ withdrawn” positions, allowing the padlocking procedures and
incorporating the man / switchboard interface elements on the front panel.
b In feeders, the need to indicate and control on the front panel of the FU and the
necessity to padlock are the main choice criteria.
b The moving part supports the switchgear by means of a mounting plate. It is
guided in its movement and positioning, and ball bearings minimise the operating
effort.
b The front panel of the drawer gives priority to ergonomics and intuition of
operations by the arrangement of the locking facilities and operating mechanisms.
b Access to the inside of the drawer may be necessary during operation, to make
settings or carry out a thermographic check. A deliberate opening by swivelling the
front panel is possible using a tool.
b An IP 2X degree of protection is maintained in the test and draw-out positions.
b Locking is possible in all positions by a padlock (3 padlocks not supplied), as is
also padlocking of empty compartments.
4-2 BLK052010E
Power Control Center Feeders
< 630 A
Fixed FU
Circuit breaker derating coefficient

A comprehensive list of configurations (the most frequent) are drawn up in addition
to the circuit breaker derating.
The respective breaker tables indicate the admissible currents for each type of
circuit breaker in accordance with:
b the outside ambient temperature
b the degree of protection and
b the position in the switchboard
Altitude plays an important part in influencing the circuit breaker characteristics. It

does not infuence the characteristics up to 2000 m.
Overall, the circuit breaker must be derated by applying the following coefficient:
Altitude 0 - 2000 m 3000 m 4000 m 5000 m

current (ComPacT
circuit breaker)
Altitude 0 - 2000 m 3000 m 4000 m 5000 m

Derating factor for the 1 0.88 0.78 0.68
voltage (ComPacT
circuit breakers)
BLK052010E 4-3
Power Control Center Selection of functional unit
< 630 A
Overview
Selection of the functional unit - rated 415 V - 50 / 60 Hz - IP31 / 35 °C

Withdrawability In (A) Device Max. qty Max. modularity Cubicle
of devices (1 module = 50 mm)
Withdrawable 100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 1 6 modules
(chassis) vertical position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 2 8 modules
horizontal position
400 < In < 630 NSX400-630 1 8 modules
vertical position
type D
Plug-in 100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 4 6 modules
vertical position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 1 3 modules
horizontal position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 2 3 modules
horizontal position
400 < In < 630 NSX400-630 1 4 modules
horizontal position
type D
Fixed In < 63 iC60 24 3 modules
In < 160 NSXm160 1 4 modules
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 4 6 modules
vertical position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 1 3 modules
horizontal position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 2 3 modules
horizontal position
400 < In < 630 NSX400-630 1 4 modules
horizontal position type D
Selection of the functional unit - rated 690 V - 50 / 60 Hz - IP31 / 35 °C

Withdrawability In (A) Device Max. qty of Max. modularity Cubicle
devices (1 module = 50 mm)
Fixed In < 100 NSX100HB1/HB2 1 4 modules
250 < In <400 NSX250HB1/HB2 1 6 modules
NSX400 HB1/HB2
In < 630 NSX630 HB1/HB2 1 8 modules
type D
Drawer In < 100 NSX100HB1/HB2 1 4 modules

100 < In < 400 NSX400HB1/HB2 1 6 modules
Mw2
4-4 BLK052010E
Power Control Center Selection of functional unit
< 630 A
Fixed FU
Width 400mm fixed PCC feeders

Withdrawability In (A) Device Max. qty of Max. modularity FU form factor
devices (1 module = 50 mm)
Withdrawable (chassis) 100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 1 6 modules upto form2
vertical position
Plug-in 100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 2 6 modules upto form2
vertical position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250 1 3 modules upto form4
horizontal position
horizontal position
Fixed In < 63 iC60 12 3 modules upto form2

vertical position
100 < In < 250 NSX100-250/ 2 3 modules upto form4
NSX100-250 /
NSXm100-160
horizontal position
BLK052010E 4-5
Power Control Center Panorama of configurations
Electrical distribution D cubicle
< 630 A
Overview
device iC60
technology fixed
form 3b / 4b
types of device connection SC

RC
front face individual with front
face / multiple with
front plates
toggle p
direct rotary handle
motor mechanism
extended rotary handle p
Vigi block
residual current relay
device NSX100 / 630
technology fixed mounting plate

fixed device plugin device
form 2b 3b/4a/4b 2b 3b/4a/4b
types of device connection SC SC SC SC

RC RC RC RC
front face common door individual door common door individual door
toggle control p p p p
direct rotary handle p p p p
motor mechanism p p p (2) p
extended rotary handle - p - p
Vigi block p (1) p (1) p (1) p (1)
residual current relay p p p p
(1) except for ComPacT NSX100/250 on a 2-devices mounting plate.

(2) except for ComPacT NSX400-630.
device NSXm160
technology fixed mounting plate

fixed device
form 2b 3b/4a/4b
types of device connection SC SC

RC RC
front face common door individual door
toggle control p -
direct rotary handle p -
extended rotary handle - p
4-6 BLK052010E
Power Control Center iC60
< 630 A
Installation rules b Type of connection

v Side connection and Rear connection,
b CTs installation
v inside the drawer.
b Rotary handle
v to order with the device.
b Form
v up to form 4.
Dimensions
Max. modularity
Current (A) 10 16 25 63 100 125
iC60 2M ½-width
4M ½-width
4M width
Note: BlokSeT mounting plates allows to install 48 quantity of iC60's per row.
W 400mm iC60

b CTs installation
b Rotary handle
b Form
v up to form 4.
Dimensions
Max. modularity
Current (A) 10 16 25 63 100 125
iC60 2M ½-width
4M ½-width
4M width
Note: BlokSeT mounting plates allows to install 12 quantity of iC60's per row.
BLK052010E 4-7
Power Control Center NSX100-630 / NSXm100-160
< 630 A
Selection
Installation rules b Type of connection:

v Side connection (right and/or left compartment),
v Rear connection.
b Switchgear assembly:
v ComPacT NSX100-250, fixed or base-mounted, on a one or two device
mounting plate,
v ComPacT NSXm-160, fixed on a 1 device mounting plate
v ComPacT NSX400-630, fixed or base-mounted, on a one device mounting
plate
b Customer connection:
v directly to the terminals of the device,
v to terminal blocks situated in the connection compartments.
b Installation of CTs:
v in connection compartments (non-functionalised installation).
b Front panel:
v feeders grouped behind a plain or transparent door,
v feeders behind separate doors.
b IP31/42/54: according to the IP of the device doors and controls.
b Modularity: it depends on the rating of the device and its installation mode (fixed
or base-mounted).
b Cross-section of the connection cables.
Functional unit description

1 x NSX400-630 (Fixed)
Mounting plate
VBB links
1 x NSX400-630 (Plug-in)
Mounting plate
VBB links
Dimensions Max. modularity

Current (A) 100 125 160 250 400 630
NSXm100-160 3 Pole 3M
4 Pole 3M
NSX100-250 3 Pole 3M
4 Pole 4M
NSX400-630 3 Pole 4M
4 Pole 6M
4-8 BLK052010E
Power Control Center Panorama of configurations
Electrical distribution Mw2 drawer
< 630 A
device iC60 NSX100 / 630

NSXm160
technology drawer drawer

form 3b / 4b 3b / 4b
types of device connection SC SC

RC RC
front face individual front face individual front face
toggle - -
direct rotary handle - -
motor mechanism - -
extended rotary handle p p
Vigi block - -
residual current relay - -
400mm Width offer: NSX100-250 / NSXm100-160
The cubicle (NSX)

b The NSX breakers can be mounted in possible widths of 400 mm, 600 mm,800
mm or 1000mm.
b The cubicle accepts maximum of 9 devices for NSX up to 250 A and maximum of 9
devices for NSXm up to 160 A.
The functional unit

b NSX100-250 Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, used feeders.
b NSXm100-160 devices are fixed, used feeders.
b The free area around the device can be used to install auxiliaries or measuring
instruments or add additional meetering compartments.
b Connection to VBB is through cables only.
b Customer connection is either cable from device terminals or cables connceted
from outgoing busbar links
b Customer connection types: Side connection (right and/or left compartment), or
Rear connection.
b Installation of CTs in connection compartments (non-functionalised installation).
b Functional unit modularity depends on the rating of the device and its installation
mode (fixed or base-mounted).
b Device derating values for W400 offer are same as standard NSX/NSXm derating
values provided in the above section of this catalogue.
Max. modularity for IP y 42/ 35°C - 415 V

Current (A) 100 125 160 250
NSXm100-160 3 Pole 3M
4 Pole 4M
NSX100-250 3 Pole
Horizontal Mounting 3M
4 Pole 4M
NSX100-250 3 Pole 6M & 6+3M
Vertical Mounting
4 Pole 6M & 6+3M
BLK052101E 4-9
Electrical distribution NSX100-630 / NSXm100-160
< 630 A Mw2 drawer
WWW
Overview

b CTs installation
b Rotary handle
b Form
v up to form 4.
Form 4 for rear connection
Form 4 for side connection

Customer outgoing
Fixed part Auxiliary connector
Power plugs
Moving part Handle
Index mechanism
Front face
Form 4 for rear connection

70-M drawers soltions include functional units
equipped with:
b Current transformers
b auxiliary transformers Customer outgoing
b 24 Auxiliary contact for C100H drawer
b 48 Auxiliary contact for other drawers Form 4 for side connection
Downstream power plug
Fixed part
Handle
Upstream power plug
Auxiliary connector
Moving part
Index mechanism
Front face
4-10 BLK052101E
Electrical distribution NSX100-630 / NSXm100-160
< 630 A Mw2 drawer
WWW
Example of functional unit: Ue = 415 V - IP y 42 / 35°C
iC60
Max. modularity for IP y 42/ 35°C - 415 V
Current (A) 10 16 25 63 100 125
iC60 2M ½-width
NSX100-630, NSXm100-160
Max. modularity for IP y 42 / 35°C - 415 V

Current (A) 16 63 100 125 160 250 400 630
NSXm100 3M½-width
3M
NSX100/ 4M½-width
CVS100
4M
NSXm160 (3P) 4M
(4P) 6M
NSX160/ 4M
CVS160
NSX250/ 4M
CVS250
NSX250* 6M
NSX250* 8M
NSX400/ 6M
CVS400
NSX400* 10M
NSX630/ 8M
CVS630
NSX630* 10M
* Only use MCCB+contactor for lighting drawer.
BLK052101E 4-11
Notes Control Center
Power
< 630 A
4-12 BLK052101E
Power Control Center Operating Mechanisms
< 630 A
Selection
Type Position Circuit breaker control IP
A Behind door
(2-4 CB)
20 31 42 54
Toggle Direct Rotary M.Mechanism

Handle
B (1) Through door 20 31
Toggle Direct Rotary M.Mechanism

Handle
C Behind door
(Individual) Toggle Direct M.Mechanism Extended 20 31 42 54
Rotary Rotary Handle
Handle
Through front
20
plate
D
Through front Toggle Direct Rotary
plate + global Handle 20 31 42 54
door
E Behind door
(frame)
20 31 42 54
Note: For NSXm only B,C & D type possible.
(1) Motor mechanism not available for NSXm
BLK052810E 4-13
Power Control Center Outgoing cables connection
Electrical distribution layout & connection method
< 630 A
Selection
(1)
Circuit Breaker with Front Connection
(2)
Circuit Breaker with Rear Connection

Outgoing cables connection layout & connection method
Outgoing cables layout & connection method has an impact on the quantity & cross section of cables
to be used
(3)
For cables directly connected to rear terminal
(4)
For NSX Breaker cables connected directly on the circuit breaker
(MCCB’s only up to 250) with cable connectors (cables up to 95 mm² -
ref.: LV429227 (3P) / LV429228 (4P) cables between 120 and
185 mm²- ref.: LV429259(3P) / LV429260 (4P))
For NSXM breaker use EverLink connectors
(5)
Circuit breaker with outgoing connection on bars
4-14 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Type of operating
No. of CBs Position No. of modules Form Fixing
mechanism (2)
up to 48 modules of 9 mm Vertical 3 1 A/ B / D fixed
up to 48 modules of 9 mm Vertical 4 (1) 1 A/ B / D fixed
(1) 4 modules are necessary if the customer cable size is equal or bigger than 10 mm2.
(2) Refer "Operating Mechanisms", page 4-13.
BLK052810E 4-15
Power Control Center ComPacT NSX100 to 630
Electrical distribution NSXm100-160
< 630 A
Overview
Installation rules
The cubicle (NSX)

b The NSX breakers can be mounted in four possible widths of 700 mm, 900 mm,
1100 mm or 1300 mm in the D cubicle.
b The cubicle accepts:
v a maximum of 9 devices for NSX up to 250 A
v and a maximum of 4 devices for NSX greater than 250 A
The functional unit

b Devices are both fixed and withdrawable, and can be used as incomers or
feeders.
instruments.
b Connection to the load can be done:
v by cables, directly from the top or from the rear.
v or by busbar trunking, directly from the top or from the rear.
The cubicle (NSXm)

b The NSXm breakers can be mounted in four possible widths of 700 mm, 900
mm, 1100 mm or 1300 mm in the D cubicle.
b The cubicle accepts:
v a maximum of 9 devices for NSXm up to 160 A
The functional unit

b Devices are only fixed type & as incomer or feeder.
instruments.
b Connection to the load can be done:
v by cables, either on side or rear connection.
4-16 BLK052810E
Power Control Center ComPacT NSX 100 to 630
Electrical distribution NSXm100-160
< 630 A
Compact NSX
or Vertical position
Compact NSXm
position
700
200
T°amb (°C)
IP y 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C

NSX100 100 100 95 95 95 95 90 85
NSXm100 95 93 90 85 90 85 83 80
NSX160 155 155 150 145 145 140 135 130
NSXm160 150 144 139 133 139 133 126 120
NSX250 240 230 225 220 215 210 205 200
NSX400 390 380 375 360 350 340 330 320
NSX630 555 550 540 520 480 470 460 450
BLK052810E 4-17
Power Control Center ComPacT NSXm
Electrical distribution Selection table
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
Current Circuit breaker with
Type of circuit Outgoing front connection
No. of Circuit breaker position and IP Transformer (CT)
breaker cables (cost-effective
Poles (Protection Index) installation
connection solution)
possibility
(2)
Through door (max IP31) OK
Front Plate (IP20) Front Plate +
Front access YES OK
Global Door (max IP54)
Behind door (max IP54) OK
NO OK
Through door (max IP31) YES OK
YES OK
Fixed
NO OK
3 Front Plate (max IP20)
OK
Front Plate + Global Door (max IP54) YES
Horizontal
Rear access NO
OK
NO NO
NO
Behind door (max IP54)
OK
NSXm 160
YES OK
NO
Front access YES OK
NO OK
Through door (max IP31)
YES OK
Fixed NO OK
Front Plate (max IP20) OK
3/4/3PN Front Plate + Global Door (max IP54) YES
NO
Horizontal
Rear access OK
NO NO
NO
OK
YES OK
NO
(2) Refer section on "Accessories and cables", page 6-6.
(6) Refer section on "Terminal shields", page 6-7.
(3) (4) (5) - Refer "Outgoing cables connection layout & connection method", page 4-14.
4-18 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Up to 690V Minimum How many Maximum outgoing copper

Circuit breaker Size of the
Cubicle circuit cables capacity, per phase
with rear Type of functional unit
dimensions Depth breakers per (Each number (3), (4), (5)
connection Form operating (in modules)
to install this (mm) functional unit is a specific cables’ installation
accessories mechanism Each module
functional (more than 1 => (see “cables layout” for
is 50 mm
(6) unit (mm) cost-effective) details)
NO 1 2 3 4 B(1)
NO 1 D 200 + 700 +
400
NO 1 2 3 4 C (1) 600
NO
NO 1 2 3 4 B(1)
NO 600 / 1000
NO #1 x 95 mm² (4)
600
NO 1 D 1 3
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 600 / 1000
200 + 700
NO 1 2 3 4
600
NO 1 2 3
NO 4 1000
C (1)
NO 1 2 3 600
NO 4 1000
NO 1 2 3 600 / 1000
NO 1 2 3 4 B(1)
200 + 700 +
NO 1 D
400
NO 1 2 3 4 C (1) 600
NO
1 2 3 4 B(1)
NO
NO
600
NO 1 D #1 x 95 mm² (4)
1 3 or 4
NO 600 / 1000 #2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 200 + 700
600
NO 1 2 3
NO 4 1000
C (1)
NO 1 2 3 600
NO 4 1000
NO 1 2 3 600 / 1000
BLK052810E 4-19
Power Control Center ComPacT NSX
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)

Front access YES OK
NO OK
Through door (max IP31) YES OK
YES OK
Fixed NO OK
NSX 100 / 160 /250
3 Front Plate (max IP20)

OK
Front Plate + Global Door (max IP54)
Horizontal YES
NO
Rear access
OK
NO NO
NO
OK
YES OK
NO

Plug-in
3 Front access YES OK
Horizontal
4-20 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Up to 690V Minimum How many Maximum outgoing copper

Circuit breaker Size of the
Cubicle circuit cables capacity, per phase
with rear Type of functional unit
dimensions Depth breakers per (Each number (3), (4), (5)
connection Form operating (in modules)
to install this (mm) functional unit is a specific cables’ installation
accessories mechanism Each module
functional (more than 1 => (see “cables layout” for
is 50 mm
(2) unit (mm) cost-effective) details)
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D
400
OK 1 2 3 4 C 600
OK
NO 1 2 3 4 B
OK 600 / 1000
OK #2 x 95 mm² (3)
600
NO 1 D 3 #1 x 185 mm² (4)
OK 600 / 1000 #2 x 185 mm² (5)

200 + 700 1
NO 1 2 3 4
600
OK 1 2 3
OK 4 1000
C
NO 1 2 3 600
OK 4 1000
OK 1 2 3 600 / 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D 600 3 #2 x 185 mm² (5)
400
OK 1 2 3 4 C
BLK052810E 4-21
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)
Plug-in
Rear access Front Plate (IP20) Front Plate +
3 YES OK
Horizontal
OK
OK

Front access YES OK
NO OK
NSX 100 / 160 /250

YES OK
NO OK
Fixed
OK
4P/3PN Front Plate (max IP20)
Horizontal Front Plate + Global Door (max IP54)
YES OK
NO
Rear access
OK
NO NO
NO
OK
YES OK
NO
Plug-in

4P/3PN Front access YES OK
Horizontal
4-22 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Maximum outgoing copper

Up to 690V Minimum How many
Size of the cables capacity, per phase
Circuit breaker with Cubicle circuit
Type of functional unit (Each number (3), (4), (5)
rear connection dimensions Depth breakers per
Form operating (in modules) is a specific cables’
accessories to install this (mm) functional unit
mechanism Each module installation
functional (more than 1 =>
(2) unit (mm) cost-effective)
is 50 mm (see “cables layout” for
details)
1 2 3 600
OK B
4 600 / 1000
OK 1 D 200 + 700 3 #2 x 185 mm² (5)

600
OK 1 2 3
C
OK 4 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D
400
600
OK 1 2 3 4 C
OK
1 2 3 4 B
OK
OK
600 #2 x 95 mm² (3)
1
NO
4 #1 x 185 mm² (4)
1 D
OK
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
600 / 1000
OK
200 + 700
NO 1 2 3 4
600
OK 1 2 3
OK 4 1000
C
NO 1 2 3 600
OK 4 1000
OK 1 2 3 600 / 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D 600 4 #2 x 185 mm² (5)
400
OK 1 2 3 4 C
BLK052810E 4-23
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)
OK
OK
Plug-in
Rear access Front Plate (IP20) Front Plate +
3 YES OK
Horizontal
OK
OK
Fixed
3 Rear access Behind door (max IP54) NO NO

NSX 100 / 160 /250
Horizontal
Plug-in
Horizontal
Fixed

Horizontal
Plug-in
4P/3PN Rear access Behind door (max IP54) NO NO
Horizontal

Fixed Global Door (max IP54)
3 Front access NO OK
Vertical
4-24 BLK052810E
< 630 A

details)
OK 1 2 3 600
B
OK 4 600 / 1000
OK 1 D 200 + 700 1 4 #2 x 185 mm² (5)

600
OK 1 2 3
C
OK 4 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700 600 3 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700 600 3 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
A 2
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700 600 4 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700 600 4 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
D
6 #1 x 95 mm² (3)
NO 1 200 + 700 600 4
A
B 6+3 #1 x 185 mm² (4)
BLK052810E 4-25
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)

Plug-in
Front access
3 NO OK
Vertical

Fixed
4P/3PN Front access Behind door (max IP54) NO OK
Vertical
NSX 100 / 160 /250

Plug-in
4P/3PN Front access Behind door (max IP54) NO OK
Vertical
3P/4P/
Rear access Behind door (max IP54) NO NO
3PN
Vertical
Withdrawable 3 Rear access Behind door (max IP54) NO NO

(chassis) Horizontal
4P/3PN Rear access Behind door (max IP54) NO OK

Horizontal
4-26 BLK052810E
< 630 A

details)
D
6 #1 x 95 mm² (3)
NO 1 200 + 700 600 4
A
B 6+3 #1 x 185 mm² (4)
D
6 #1 x 95 mm² (3)
NO 1 A 200 + 700 600 3
B 6+3 #1x185 mm² (4)
D
6 #1x95 mm² (3)
NO 1 A 200 + 700 600 3
B 6+3 #1 x 185 mm² (4)
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700 600 1 6 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
1 2 3 4 600
OK 200 + 700 8 #1 x 150 mm² (3)
4 1000
E
1 2 3 600
2
NO A 200 + 700 10 #1 x 150 mm² (3)

4 1000
BLK052810E 4-27
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)
Front access Front Plate (IP20) Front Plate +

YES OK

Fixed
NO NO
3
OK
Horizontal Through door (max IP31)
YES OK
Rear access NO

YES OK
Behind door (max IP54) YES OK

NSX 400 / 630

Front access OK
Plug-in
3 YES
Horizontal Through door (max IP31) OK

Rear access OK

Fixed
4P/3PN Front access YES OK
Horizontal
4-28 BLK052810E
< 630 A

details)
OK 1 2 3 4 B
OK 1 D 200 + 700 + #2 x 185 mm² (3)

400 #2 x 240 mm² (5)
600
OK 1 2 3 4 C
OK 1 2 3 4 #2 x 185 mm² (3)

4
NO 1 2 3
B
NO 4
OK 1 2 3 4 200 + 700
#2 x 185 mm² (3)
OK 1 D 1000 #2 x 240 mm² (5)
OK 1 2 3 4 C 1
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D 600
400
OK 12 3 4 C
4 #2 x 240 mm² (5)
OK 1 2 3 4 B
OK 1 D 200 + 700 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 C
OK 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 700 + #2 x 185 mm² (3)

OK 1 D 600 1 6
400 #2 x 240 mm² (5)
OK 1 2 3 4 C
BLK052810E 4-29
< 630 A
Selection
≤500V
possibility
(1)
NO
OK
Through door (max IP31) NO
Fixed OK
4P/3PN Rear access NO

Horizontal
YES OK
Behind door (max IP54) YES OK

Front access OK
NSX 400 / 630
Plug-in Behind door (max IP54) OK

4P/3PN YES
Horizontal Through door (max IP31) OK

Rear access OK
Front access OK
Withdrawable OK
(chassis)
3/4 Behind door (max IP54) NO
Rear access Vertical
OK
4-30 BLK052810E
< 630 A

details)
OK 1 2 3 4 600
NO 1 2 3
B
NO 4
OK 1 2 3 4 #2 x 185 mm² (3)

200 + 700
#2 x 240 mm² (5)
1000
OK 1 D
OK 1 2 3 4 C
OK 1 2 3 4 B
6
200 + 700 +
OK 1 D 600
400
OK 12 3 4 C
1
#2 x 240 mm² (5)
OK 1 2 3 4 B
OK 1 D 200 + 700 1000
OK 1 2 3 4 C
200 + 700 +
OK 1 2 3 4 600
400
OK 1 2 3 600
E 8 #2 x 240 mm²
200 + 700
OK 1 2 3 4 1000
BLK052810E 4-31
< 630 A
400mm Width PCC
Type of circuit No. of Outgoing Circuit breaker position and IP Current ≤500V Up to 690V
breaker Poles cables (Protection Index) Transformer Circuit breaker Circuit
connection (CT) with front breaker with
installation connection rear
possibility (cost-effective connection
solution) (2) accessories
(6)
NSXm 160 Fixed 3P / 4P / Front access Horizontal Through door (max IP31) YES OK NO
3PN Behind door (max IP54) NO
Rear access Through door (max IP31) YES OK NO
NO
Behind door (max IP54) YES OK NO
NO
bc - Busbar chamber
4-32 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Form Type of Minimum Cubicle Depth (mm) How many Size of the Maximum outgoing copper
operating dimensions to install circuit functional unit cables capacity, per phase
mechanism this functional unit breakers per (in modules) (Each number (3), (4), (5)
(mm) functional Each module is a specific cables’
unit is 50 mm installation (see “cables
layout” for details)
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 +400 600/1000 1 3 or 4 #1 x 95 mm² (4)

2 3 4 #2 x 185 mm² (5)
2 3 C 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000

4 1000
2 3 600/1000
4 1000
BLK052810E 4-33
< 630 A
400mm Width PCC

Type of circuit breaker No. of Outgoing Circuit breaker position and IP Current ≤500V Up to 690V
Poles cables (Protection Index) Transformer Circuit breaker Circuit
connection (CT) with front breaker
installation connection with
possibility (cost-effective rear
solution) connection
(1) accessories
(2)
NSX 100/160/250 Fixed 3 Front access Horizontal Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Behind door (max IP54) Yes Yes No
Rear access Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
4 or Front access Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
3PN Behind door (max IP54) Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes No
Plugin 3 Front access Horizontal Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Behind door (max IP54) No Yes No
Yes Yes No
No Yes No
4 or Front access Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
3PN Behind door (max IP54) No Yes No
Yes Yes No
No Yes No
NSX 100/160 Fixed 3 Front access / Vertical Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Rear access
4 Front access / Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Rear access
Plugin 3 Front access / Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Rear access
Rear access
NSX 250 Fixed 3 Front access / Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Rear access
Rear access
Plugin 3 Front access / Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Rear access
Rear access
NSX 100/160 On - 3 or 4 Front access Vertical Through door (max IP31) Yes Yes No
Chassis
(1) Motor mechanism not available for NSXm (2) Refer section on "Accessories and cables", page 6-6. (6) Refer section on "Terminal shields", page 6-7.
4-34 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Form Type of Minimum Cubicle Depth How many Size of the Maximum outgoing copper
operating dimensions to install this (mm) circuit functional unit cables capacity, per phase
mechanism functional unit (mm) breakers per (in modules) (Each number (3), (4), (5)
functional Each module is a specific cables’
unit (more is 50 mm installation
than 1 => (see “cables layout” for
cost- details)
effective)
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 +400 600/1000 1 3 #2 x 95 mm² (3)
2 3 4 C #1 x 185 mm² (4)
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
2 3 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 C 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 +400 600/1000 4
2 3 4 C
2 3 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 C 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 +400 600/1000 1 3 #2 x 95 mm² (3)
2 3 4 C #1 x 185 mm² (4)
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
2 3 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 C 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 +400 600/1000 4
2 3 4 C
2 3 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000
4 Fishbone : 400+ 200(bc) 1000
2 3 C 600/1000
4 1000
2 3 B(1) Standard : 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000 2 6 #2 x 95 mm² (3)
#1 x 185 mm² (4)
2 3 C
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
2 3 B(1) 1
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 2
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 1
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000 2 6+3
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 1
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 2
2 3 C
2 3 B(1) 1
2 3 C
2 3 4 B(1) 200(bc)+ 400 600/1000 1 6 #2 x 95 mm² (3)
#1 x 185 mm² (4)
2 3 4 C
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
2 3 4 B(1) 6+3
2 3 4 C
(3) (4) (5) - Refer "Outgoing cables connection layout & connection method", page 4-14. bc - Busbar chamber
BLK052810E 4-35
Power Control Center MCCB Direct Tapping to HBB
< 630 A
MCCB Direct connection to HBB is a solution to offer MCCB as an Incomer for

voltage upto 500 V and is directly connected to Main Busbar. Compact breakers
upto 630 A is available in this offer.
Solution is available for Fixed as well as Plugin Breaker.
MCCB can be used as an incomer with the different connection types
b Connection to Top HBB – Type 2

b Connection to Bottom HBB – Type 1
b Buscoupler Bottom HBB – Type 4a
b Buscoupler Top HBB – Type 4b
b Rear Customer Connection (1000 mm Depth) – Type 6
b Rear Customer Connection (600 mm Depth) – Type 7
b Front Customer Connection – 8a and 8b
Connection Method and Accessories
Connection way Terminal shield busbar/

Un<500V Breaker
to the CB type cables
D Type NSX Front of the CB Long terminal shield Copper bars
100/160/250
Rear of the CB short terminal shield Copper bars
NSX 400/630 Front of the CB Long terminal shield Copper bars
Rear of the CB short terminal shield Copper bars
NSX 100/160/250 NSX400/630

Long Terminal shield Ref. LV429517 LV432593
3P
Short Terminal shield Ref. LV429515 LV432591
Long Terminal shield Ref. LV429518 LV432594
4P
Short Terminal shield Ref. LV429516 LV432592
Connection Connection Type Terminal Shield

1 Front Long terminal shield
1 Rear Short terminal shield
2 Front Long terminal shield
4a Front Long terminal shield
4b Front Long terminal shield
8a Front Long terminal shield
8b Front Long terminal shield
4-36 BLK052810E
< 630 A
BLK052810E 4-37
Power Control Center MCCB Direct Tapping to HBB
< 630 A
Device Installation Horizontal Operating Installation type Busbar Customer

Busbar Mechanism connection connection
Single Double
NSX 100/160/250 Fixed and X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 6
Plug in
X - TOG/DRH/ERH/MM Through Door, Behind Door 1 6
X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 7
Fixed X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 8a
X - TOG/DRH/ERH/MM Through Door, Behind Door 1 8a
X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 2 8b
X - TOG/DRH/ERH/MM Through Door, Behind Door 2 8b
NSX 400/630 Fixed and X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 6
Plug in
Fixed X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 8a
Buscoupler
NSX 100/160/250 Fixed X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 4a
NSX 400/630 X - TOG/DRH Front Plate 1 4a
4-38 BLK052810E
< 630 A
Customer CT Installation on CT Installation Modules Width Right Cubicle Depth Form

connection Busbar connection on Customer Width Upto
access connection
X Y Z
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 1000 1
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 1000 4
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 600 1
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 600 4
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 1000 1
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 1000 4
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 600 1
Rear No Yes 7 - 700 - 600 4
Front No No 7 - 700 200 600 1
Front No No 7 - 700 200 600 4
Front No No 7 - 700 200 600 1
Front No No 7 - 700 200 600 4
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 1000 1
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 1000 4
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 600 1
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 600 4
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 1000 1
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 1000 4
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 600 1
Rear No Yes 9 - 700 - 600 4
Front No No 9 - 700 200 600 1
Front No No 9 - 700 200 600 4
Front No No 9 - 700 200 600 1
Front No No 9 - 700 200 600 4
- No No 7 - 700 - 200+700 600 1

- No No 7 - 700 - 200+700 600 4
- No No 7 - 700 - 200+700 600 1
- No No 7 - 700 - 200+700 600 4
- No No 9 - 700 - 200+700 600 1
- No No 9 - 700 - 200+700 600 4
- No No 9 - 700 - 200+700 600 1
- No No 9 - 700 - 200+700 600 4
BLK052810E 4-39
Notes
Fishbone Offer 5-2
Coupling 5-3
Optimized buscoupler solution 5-3
Standard buscoupler solution 5-4
Standard buscoupler solution 5-5
Double front top HBB buscoupler solution 5-6
Double front bottom HBB buscoupler solution 5-7
Source changeover switches 5-8
Tie breaker and Transfer busbar 5-14
Power factor correction

and harmonic filtering 5-18
OK051010E 5-1
Power Control Center Fishbone Offer
Overview
Fishbone solution offers competitive footprint advantage for BlokSeT Switchboard.
One distribution busbar column is utilized for two sets of functional unit column.
b This offer can be used for D type ACB and MCCB Functional units for Left and
Right cubicle of Fishbone VBB.
b Mf and Ms feeders can be installed only in right cubicle of Fishbone VBB
Notes:
1. For all NS/NT/MTZ1/NW/MTZ2 vertical breakers connected to the right VBB will have a corresponding empty
module (dead zone) on right column of fishbone. The modularity of empty module will be equal to connection
door module for 4A or 4B connection.
2. For all NS horizontal breaker connected to the right VBB, dead zone will be equal to modularity of NS Feeder.
3. Refer Distribution busbar derating section for Fishbone busbar derating values.
4. ACB can be installed either on right or left side of Fishbone VBB and can function as Incomer or Outgoer.
5. Distribution busbar size which is proposed for Fishbone offer is 60 x 5 bars. Refer derating table in distribution
busbar section for performance details.
6. The distribution busbar is installed in a column of width 200 mm.
5-2 BLK052820E
Power Control Center Coupling
Optimized buscoupler solution
Overview
General rules In a PCC column (up to 2500) :

b The two incoming devices and the coupling device must be of the same type:
v 3 NW/MTZ2 and MTZ3
v 3 NT/MTZ1
v 3 NS
b The installation items to be ordered for the three devices are standard.
b Interlocking:
v electrical interlocking is recomended.
Coupling Type of connection

devices TDC BDC RC - TOP RC - BOTTOM
Buscoupler with
right VBB
MasterPact
MTZ2 08-25/NW08-25
C
1 C
1
2 2
2 1 1
MasterPact C
2
C
MTZ1 06-16/NT06-16
Optimized Buscoupler
ComPacT NS630b-1600
Buscoupler with
left VBB
MasterPact
MTZ2 08-25/NW08-25
MasterPact 2 C
C 2
1 1
MTZ1 08-16/NT08-16
2 2
1
C
C 1
ComPacT NS630-1600
1 : Incomer breaker 1
C : Buscoupler breaker
BLK052820E 5-3
Standard buscoupler solution
Overview
General rules In a PCC column (upto 3200) :

b The two incoming devices and the coupling device must be of the same type:
v 3 NW/ MTZ2 and MTZ3
v 3 NT/MTZ1
v 3 NS
b The installation items to be ordered for the three devices are standard.
b Interlocking:
v Electrical interlocking is recomended.
In the PCC column (4000 - 6300 A):

b Feeders and incoming devices are installed in columns to the left or the right of
the coupling column, adjacent or not.

devices TDC BDC
MasterPact
MTZ2 40/NW40
C
2
1
C
1
MasterPact
MTZ3 40/50/63 /
NW40b/50/63
Standard Buscoupler
2
2
C
C 1
1
MasterPact MTZ2 40/

NW40 - 4000A/3650A
2 C
1
C
1
5-4 BLK052820E
Standard buscoupler solution
Overview

devices TDC BDC
RC - TOP RC - BOTTOM
MasterPact
MTZ2 08-32/NW08-32
C
2
1
C
1
MasterPact
MTZ1 08-16/NT08-16
2
2
C
C 1
1
ComPacT NS630-1600
BLK052820E 5-5
Double front top HBB buscoupler
solution
Overview
Config 1: Breaker from MTZ2 08 / NW08 to MTZ3 63 / NW63 (Incomer adjacent to the buscoupler)
b A current rating of 800 A to 6300 A

b Customer connection is from the front
Option 2
Option 2
Option 2
Circuit Busbar connection type No. of Frame Depth

Breaker Modules work 1200
dimension (mm)
Drawout and fixed
Option 9
MTZ2 08-25 2 + Buscoupler links 12 + 8 700 X

Option 9
NW2-25
MTZ2 32 2 + Buscoupler links 4 + 12 + 12 700 X
NW32
NW40
(1) For a detailed design of the connection, refer the Assembly Guide, in ESMS version 2015. Drawout only
MTZ3 40/50/63 2 + Buscoupler links 10 + 13 + 17 1200 X
NW40b/50/63

b Customer connection is from the side (top customer entry with top HBB)
Option 2
Option 2
Option 8c
Circuit Busbar connection type No. of Framework Depth

Breaker Modules dimension 1200
Option 8b
(mm)
Drawout only
MTZ2 08-25 Buscoupler links 12 + 4 700 X
NW08-25 Buscoupler links 12 + 4 700 X
(1) For a detailed design of the connection, refer the Assembly Guide in ESMS version 2015.
Config 3: Breaker from MTZ2 08 / NW08 to MTZ3 63 / NW63 (Incomer away from buscoupler)
b A current rating of up to 6300 A

b Customer connection is from the front/side/rear
Circuit Breaker Busbar connection No. of Framework Depth

type Modules dimension 1200
Option 2
(mm)
Option 2
Drawout and fixed

Option 2

Option 6/8b/8c/9
NW08-25
MTZ2 32/NW32 2 + Buscoupler links 4 + 12 + 5 700 X
Option 6/8b/8c/9
MasterPact MTZ2 40/ 2 + Buscoupler links 7 + 12 + 13 700 + 200 X

NW40 - 4000A/3650A
Drawout only
NW40b/50/63
5-6 BLK052820E
Double front bottom HBB buscoupler
solution
Overview

b Customer connection is from the front
Option - 10
Option - 10
Circuit Busbar connection type No. of Frame Depth

Breaker Modules work 1200
dimension (mm)
Drawout and fixed
Option - 1

Option - 1
Option - 1
NW2-25
NW32
(1) For a detailed design of the connection, refer the Assembly Guide, in ESMS.version 2015
NW40
Drawout only
NW40b/50/63

b Customer connection is from the side (top customer entry with top HBB)
Option - 8
Option - 8
Circuit Busbar connection type No. of Framework Depth

Option - 1
Breaker Modules dimension 1200

(mm)
Option - 1
Drawout only
MTZ2 08-25 Buscoupler links 4 + 12 700 X
NW08-25 Buscoupler links 4 + 12 700 X
Config 3: Breaker from MTZ2 08 / NW08 to MTZ3 63 / NW63 (Incomer away from buscoupler)
b A current rating of up to 6300 A

b Customer connection is from the front/side/rear
Circuit Breaker Busbar connection No. of Framework Depth

Option - 10
type Modules dimension 1200

(mm)
Drawout and fixed
Option - 10
MTZ2 08-25 NW08-25 1 + Buscoupler links 5 + 12 700 X

Option - 1

Option - 1

Option - 1
MasterPact MTZ2 40/ 1 + Buscoupler links 11 + 12 + 9 700 + 200 X

NW40 - 4000A/3650A
Drawout only
NW40b/50/63
BLK052820E 5-7
Power Control Center Source changeover switches
Overview
Some installations use two supply sources to counter the temporary loss of the main supply. A source-
changeover system is required to safely switch between the two sources. The replacement source can be a
generator set or another network.
Manual source-changeover system

The simplest way to switch the load. It is controlled manually by an operator. The time required to
switch from the S1 source to S2 source is variable.
System
2 or 3 mechanically interlocked circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.
Applications
Small commercial buildings and small and medium industrial activities where the need for
continuity of service is significant but not a priority.
Automatic source-changeover system

A controller may be added to automatically control the operation of a changeover system. This
may be achieved either by means of a dedicated ready to use controler (UA-BA) or by a traditonal
programmable logic controler (PLC).
These solutions ensure optimum energy management. The time required to switch from the S1
source to S2 source is fixed.
System
2 or 3 circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system. A
mechanical interlocking system protects also against incorrect manual operations, with an
automatic control system (dedicated controllers).
Applications
Large infrastructures, industry, critical buildings & process where the continuity of service is a
priority.
UA BA Controller
By combining a remote-operated source-changeover system with an integrated BA or UA

automatic controller, it is possible to automatically control source transfer according to user-
selected sequences.
These controllers can be used on source-changeover systems comprising 2 circuit breakers. For
source changeover systems comprising 3 circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must
be prepared by the installer as a complement to to diagrams provided in the “electrical diagrams”
section of this catalogue.
5-8 BLK052820E
Overview
ComPacT NSX 100-630
Manual Auto
Device Type Access Position Fixation Connection Front view No. of modules
NSX100/250
Manual Front or rear Vertical Fixed Vertical busbar B 6
NSX400/630 Horizontal
Manual Rear Vertical Fixed A 12
busbar
NSX100/250 Auto Front or rear Horizontal Fixed Vertical busbar A 12
NSX400/630 Auto Front or rear Horizontal Fixed Vertical busbar A 14
BLK052820E 5-9
Overview
ComPacT NS 630b - NS 1600, 3/4P fixed behind or through door withdrawable behind or through door
MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT06 to 16,3/4P fixed/withdrawable
(2) Automatic source

change over system
Option 1 + 8a
Option 1 + 6
Option 2 + 9
Option 2 + 9
Individual Column
Front Access : Depth 600; Width 400 + 700 + 200 Rear Access : Depth 1000; Width 400 + 700
Available in IP20 up to IP54, form 1 up to 4.
ComPacT NS 630b - NS 1600, 3/4P fixed behind or through door, withdrawable behind or through door
MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT06 to 16, 3/4P fixed/withdrawable

change over system
Connected to Standard Vertical Busbar
Front Access : Depth 600; Width 200 + 700 + 200 + 200/400 Rear Access : Depth 1000; Width 200 + 700
Available in IP20 up to IP54, form 1 up to 4.
5-10 BLK052820E
Overview
ComPacT NS 630b to NS 1600, 3/4P withdrawable behind door

MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT 06 to 16, 3P/4P Withdrawable

change over system
Option 1 + 8a
Option 1 + 6
Option 2 + 9
Option 2 + 9
Individual Column
Available in IP20 up to IP54, 40 modules for installation of equipment.
ComPacT NS 630b to NS 1600, 3/4P withdrawable behind door

MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT 06 to 16, 3P/4P Withdrawable

change over system
Connected to Standard Vertical Busbar
Available in IP20 up to IP54, form 1 upto 4.
BLK052820E 5-11
Overview
ComPacT NS 630b to NS 1600, 3/4P fixed behind door

MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16 / NT 06 to 16, 3P/4P Fixed
(1) Only manual command for

the source change over
Individual Column
Front/Rear Access: Depth 600; Width 700
Available in IP20 up to IP31, form 1, 40 modules for installation of equipment.
MasterPact MTZ2 08 to 25 / NW 08 to 25, 3/4P fixed/drawout through door

change over system
Individual Column
Front Access : Depth 600; Width 400 + 700 + 200 + 200/400 Rear Access : Depth 1000; Width 400 + 700 + 200
Available in IP20 up to IP54, form 1 up to 4. 40 modules for installation of equipment.
5-12 BLK052820E
Overview
MasterPact MTZ2 32 to 40 / NW32 to 40, 3P/4P fixed/ drawout (Front/Rear access)
(1) Define the number of modules as per breaker mounted.

(2) Automatic source change over system.
(3) Details about modularity, see dwg 51131664 for MTZ2 32 or dwg 51131686 for
MTZ2 40.
Front Access/Rear Access: Depth 600; Width 700+700+200+700+200
MasterPact MTZ3 40 to 63 / NW40b to 63, 3P/4P, Fixed/Drawout (Front/Rear access)
(1) Define the number of modules as per breaker mounted.

(2) Automatic source change over system.
(3) Details about modularity, see dwg 51131684 for MTZ3 40 or dwg: 51131654 for
MTZ3 50/63.
Front Access/Rear Access: Depth 600; Width 1200+1200+1200
BLK052820E 5-13
Power Control Center Tie breaker and Transfer busbar
Overview
MasterPact MTZ2 40 / NW40 and single busbars
For assembling the earth bar, see details in drawings 51128731 and 51131025.
MasterPact MTZ3 40/50/63 / NW40b/50/63 and double busbars
For assembling the earth bar, see details in drawings 51128731 and 51131025.
5-14 BLK052820E
Power Control Center Power factor correction
and harmonic filtering
Overview
Installation of VarPlus Can capacitors:

General considerations
Capacitors are electrochemical components whose lifespan depends on the
air average temperature around them. BlokSeT design and choice tables show
solutions which fully guarantee the maximum lifespan of VarPlus Can capacitors.
Installation of capacitors in BlokSeT highly depends on:

Sn (kVA) b switchboard room temperature (ambient temperature)
b the chosen IP
In some cases, some restrictions may appear:

b Capacitor cubicles can not be installed in a room with a temperature higher than
45°C.
Qc b Capacitors are highly sensitive to harmonics. A high level of harmonic pollution
P (kW) Gh (kVA) (kvar) causes capacitors to overheat and age prematurely (breakdown). Devices using
power electronics (variable speed drives, rectifiers, UPS, arc furnaces, fluorescent
Sn: apparent power of the transformer. lamps, etc.) circulate harmonic currents in electrical networks.
Gh: apparent power of harmonics-generating
receivers (variable speed motors, static converters,Different types of compensation must be chosen according to the power of the
harmonic generators. The choice of the capacitors according to the level of
power electronics, etc) harmonic pollution is made with the Gh / Sn ratio (refer "Installation tables BlokSeT
Qc: power of the compensation equipment Capacitors VarPlus Box _VarPlus Can" in the technical transfer file).
U: network voltage
Recommendations for the use of VarPlus Can capacitors recommendations in BlokSeT

■ VarPlus Logic power factor (cos phi) control relays
■ ComPacT NSX circuit breakers.
■ Fuses are not recommended as:
v VarPlus Can are equipped with sensitive disconnectors that disconnect

capacitors at its end of life, or in case of abnormal conditions.
v ComPacT NSX breakers are protecting the cables between MCCB and
capacitors. In this case, MCCB are the best choice to protect cable: better
selectivity and better limitation power than fuses.
v Tesys D range contactors (refer the design and offer selection table tables).
The design available in BlokSeT is type Dc: cubicle dedicated to capacitors.
BLK052820E 5-15
Overview
Example of maximum kVAr capacity per Dc cubicle, at 50 Hz
With VarPlus Can in BlokSeT, the derating calculations is not required. The
Installation tables give you the components reference and quantity according to
your reactive power need, network frequency, IP and ambient temperature.
Forced Ventilation
VarPlus Can max harmonics
Rated Ambient
Freq (Hz) IP and type of ventilation reactive power per ratio Gh/Sn
voltage (V) temp. (°C)
cubicle (kvar) y 20%
50 230 35 all IP - forced ventilation 216 x
Note: For a detailed choice of capacitors, fans, circuit breakers settings,

contactors, kindly refer "Installation tables BlokSeT Capacitors VarPlus Box
_VarPlus Can" in the technical transfer file.
5-16 BLK052820E
Overview
LC1-D•K Contactor in BlokSeT:
Capacitor control is accompanied by transient operating conditions resulting from

the capacitor load which generates a very high overcurrent equivalent to a short-
circuit of short duration.The use of standard contactors may compromise on the
safety of personnel and damage to equipment. The use of LC1-D•K contactors for
capacitor control is mandatory within BlokSeT.
The LC1-D•K contactors are:

b specially designed for capacitor control
b fitted with a contact block allowing the current to pass on closing
b fitted with damping resistors limiting the current on energisation.
This is a unique technology that is patented. Their durability is far greater than that
of conventional solutions (e.g. 300,000 operating cycles at 400 V).
In order to avoid any safety issue, it is mandatory when using capacitor plates with
more than 60 kVAr, to split the capacitor in two banks, with 1 LC1-D•K contactor for
each bank, as shown in the following schematic.
POWER CIRCUIT
A
CABLE A
1 3 5
52
2 4 6 CABLE B
VAR + LOGIC
13
1 3 5 1 3 5
13 21 C1 C2 13 21
14
14 22 14 22
2 4 6 2 4 6 A1 C1 A1 C2
A2 A2
CABLE C
CAPACITOR 1 CAPACITOR 2
BLK052820E 5-17
Overview
Electrical network pollution
Asynchronous motors, transformers, reactors and static converters are the biggest
consumers of reactive energy.
The main consequences are:
v overheating,
v line losses,
v voltage drops,
v increased contractual demand.
Devices using power electronics (variable speed drives, rectifiers, UPS, arc
furnaces, fluorescent lamps, etc.) are responsible for the circulation of harmonic
currents in electrical networks.
The main consequences are:
v interference with the operation of many devices,
v early ageing (breakdown) of capacitors.
The reactive components
VarPlus Can HDuty

RC, TC, VC, XC, YC depending on voltage and reactive power required.
Harmonic Hduty
Depending on the power network pollution.
Active Harmonic Filter

AccuSine+ active filter provides total power factor correction.
It performs both PF correction and Harmonic Filtering functions.
5-18 BLK052820E
Overview
Installation rules
Power factor correction functional units are installed in a dedicated Dc cubicle:
■ with no vertical busbar
■ column of 400/700 mm width
b compliant with IP 31, 42 or 54
b Detune reactor offered in separate column
b PFC cannot be used in DF Design
b Not suitable to use in 3C2 environment
IP 42 or 54 are always with a forced ventilation. IP 31 is with natural ventilation for

small reactive powers and with forced ventilation for high ones.
b The functional units are connected to the horizontal busbar through the vertical
busbar.
b The horizontal busbar can be installed at the top or at the bottom of the cubicle.
b The capacitors are controlled through 1 or 2 contactors and protected with a
circuit breaker.
b Reactor column is offered only with HBB on TOP
In order to guaranty a right air flow on the capacitors, the additional frame of
400 mm is added to reach 1000 mm must be closed on the lateral sides. Refer
drawing 51131363.
For assembly of Detune reactor refere dwg: QGH81726.
Capacitors
Capacitor
mounting plates
Sheet
metal parts
Contactors
Protection
device
BLK052820E 5-19
Overview
Product installation The solution can be combined with the VarPlus Logic N option: automated step
control depending on the reactive power measured (up to 10 sequences).
It also controls the discharge time (1 minute) of the capacitors to protect them
PD405099
PD405098
against early ageing.
For optimised operation and to ensure the durability of the power factor correction
and filtering components, the power factor correction and harmonic filtering column
must be ventilated.
It will therefore be fitted with:
b an extractor fan behind a grill, at the bottom of the front panel,
Extractor fan on the front b an air outlet on the rear panel.
panel
The VarPlus Logic VL controllers permanently measure the reactive power of the
Air outlet on the rear installation and control connection and disconnection of capacitor steps in order to
panel obtain the required power factor.
PB100030-SE
VarPlus Logic
Examples of BlokSeT "Power factor

correction and filtering" configurations
Without Detuned Reactor
VarCan or Custom connection

(without DR)
VarCan or Custom
VarCan or Custom (without DR)
(without DR)
VarCan or Custom
VarCan or Custom (without DR)
NSX or (without DR)
VarCan or Custom
NS400 (*) VarCan or Custom (without DR)
(without DR) VarCan or Custom
(without DR)
connection
External protection, bottom connection Internal protection,

(*)
according to network voltage top connection
With Detuned Reactor
connection connection
Detuned
reactor
Custom Detuned Custom
Detuned
reactor reactor
Detuned Custom
Custom reactor
Custom Detuned
Detuned Custom reactor
Detuned reactor
Custom reactor
Custom Detuned
reactor
Internal protection, top connection. Internal protection, top connection.
5-20 BLK052820E
Power Control Center AccuSine+ active filter
installation inside BlokSeT
Overview
AccuSine+ Active Filter

Features:
■ Power quality problem is one of the major cause of unscheduled downtime and
equipment malfunction and damage.
■ A capital investment in power factor correction and harmonic filtering equipment
can result in healthy return of investment.
b AccuSine+ Active filter performs both PF correction and Harmonic Filtering
functions.
Simplified illustration of operation of AccuSine+ Active Filter
BLK052820E 5-21
Overview
Filter
AccuSine+ active filter provides total power factor correction.
It performs both PF correction and Harmonic Filtering functions.
PowerLogic AccuSine™ PCS+ PowerLogic AccuSine™ PFV+
Nominal Rating 60A, 120A 60A, 120A
Nominal Voltage 208 – 480V 208 – 480V
Harmonic mitigation (3ph)

Leading/Lagging Power Factor correction Leading/Lagging Power Factor correction
Modes of Operation True Power Factor correction Flicker mitigation
Flicker mitigation Mains Load Balancing
Mains Load Balancing
See catalogue for detailed technical specifications
1) Both products have the exact same dimensions.
5-22 BLK052820E
Functional Unit dimension (60A & 120A)
Single HBB -60 A and 120 A Filter Double HBB -60 A Filter & MCCB Double HBB -120 A A Filter mounted
& MCCB mounted inside panel of mounted inside panel of W600 inside panel of W600-MCCB in
W600 other Column – Fixed D Distribution,
Drawout PCC
Functional Unit Information
Upto 480 V, IP ≤ 31 /40°C.
Current Rating of
MCCB Type AccuSine PCS+ AccuSine PFV+
Accusine +
60 A NSX100S PCSP060D5IP00 EVCP060D2IP00
120 A NSX160S PCSP120D5IP00 EVCP120D2IP00
1) For Double front switchboard either two accusine cubicle can be placed Back to Back or any other fixed type or Drawout feeders can be
placed back to accusine cubicle with the change in frame width ( 800, 900, 1000, 1100 mm) available in Mw2 Offer.
2) Restricted for 3C2 environment, Siesmic Compliance and Internal Arc compliance.
Notes
and Motor Control
Center
Technical description 6-2

Types of functional units 6-2
Drawer indicator 6-3
Drawer stopper 6-4
Type and installation of

current transformers 6-5
Accessories and cables 6-6
Terminal shields 6-7
Earth Leakage Protection 6-8
MCCB with motor mechanism in PCC drawer 6-9
MCCB + Contactor for lighting drawer 6-9
BLK061001E 6-1
and Motor Control Types of functional units
Center
Overview
Withdrawable FU in drawer (WWW)

b The withdrawable drawer is used in a huge range of electrical distribution
Functional Units, up to 630 A and motor control feeders upto 250 kW. The drawer
PD401013
is used to make up a FU consisting of several mechanically attached devices,

that can assume the “plug-in / test / draw-out / withdrawn” positions, allowing the
padlocking procedures and incorporating the man / switchboard interface elements
on the front panel.
b In distribution, the need to indicate:
v the devices control on the front panel of the FU
v the necessity to padlock are the main choice criteria for this solution.
PD401014
b The assembly of the fixed part is possible when the power is on, making it easy
or onsite modifications. The fixed part supports the upstream and downstream
plug-in clamps.
b The moving part supports the electrical components by means of a mounting
plate. It is guided in its movement and positioning by the guiding rail.
b The front panel of the drawer gives priority to ergonomics and intuition of
operations by the arrangement of the locking facilities and operating mechanisms.
b Access to the inside of the drawer may be necessary during operation, to make
settings or carry out thermographic checks. It is possible to open the front face of
the drawer is possible using a screw driver.
b Operating safety is guaranteed by a mechanical device disabling working when
PD401006
the protection device is closed (for drawers equipped with miniature air circuit
breakers).
b In service condition, when the drawer is on and inserted inside the cubicle, a
mechanical interlock in the mobile part fixes with the fixed part, which prevents the
drawer being extracted, therefore preventing flash.
b An IP XXD degree of protection is maintained in the test and draw-out positions
b For enchanced safety feature, there are several padlocking solutions possible:
Mw2 drawers v at the indexing push button (1 padlock possible)
v at the breaker operating handle (max. of 3 padlocks possible)
Ready to wire (RTW) offer is an optional offer for front faces, and must be used
depending on customer requirement only. For guidelines to convert a standard offer
into an RTW offer, refer assembly drawing no. EAV8162102.
Drawer position indicator

Drawer operation is very simple. Using the black indexing pushbutton, the operator
can simply move the drawer in the “plug-in / test / draw-out” positions.
The “plug-in / test / draw-out” positions are marked as follows:

1) Indexing mark: “>>” on the left side of the drawer.
2) Mechanical indicator: This is an optional accessory and can be viewed on the
front face of the drawer.
For details regarding the mechanical drawer indicator, refer assembly

drawing no. EAV92595.
Mw2 drawers
6-2 BLK061001E
and Motor Control Drawer indicator
Center
Overview
Drawer positions
Plug-in
b The functional unit is operational
b Power and auxiliaries are connected
Test
b The functional unit is not operational
b Only auxiliaries are connected
b Allows padlocking
v at the indexing push button
v at the breaker handle
b Allows the electrical verification of the functional unit
b Allows maintenance on the process
Draw out
b The functional unit is not operational
b Power and auxiliaries are disconnected
b Allows padlocking
v at the indexing push button
v at the breaker handle
b Allows maintenance on the process
Withdrawn
b The drawer can be fully extracted
b Allows quick replacement ensuring continuity of supply
b Allows ease of maintenance during switchboard live change
BLK061001E 6-3
Power Control Center Drawer stopper
and Motor Control
Center
Overview
The drawer stopper is a simple mechanism mounted on the right side of the
moving part of the drawer.
It is designed to hold the moving part of the drawer rigidly, before being completely
withdrawn (maximum withdrawable limit). This is specially developed feature that
prevents accidental falls of the drawer, ensuring a high level of personnel safety.
Drawer stopper positions

Drawer Plug in position
Fixed part
Drawer withdrawn position
Push up to unlock the drawer.
Extraction possible - once drawer unlocked
6-4 BLK061001E
Power Control Center Type and installation of
and Motor Control current transformers
Center
Overview
Current Transformers used for Metering purpose in BlokSeT should be selected

based on following parameters.
b Rated Continuous Thermal Current
b Rated Short Time Thermal Current
b Rated dynamic current- 2.5 times the Rated short-time thermal current
b Class 1 for Metering CT
b VA rating – 5VA (Verification of VA burden as per load connected)
Note: Refer the detailed technical specification inside “LV Transformer

Specifications” folder in PRM/BlokSeT store.
The dimension of CT’s used inside BlokSeT is from standard METSECT series of
current transformer from Schneider Electric. However, the specification of CT’s to
be chosen based on customer requirement.
Localized CT’s which are validated as per Verification plan inside “LV Transformer
Specifications” can also be used in BlokSeT to suit customer requirement.
Installing the current transformers
In Fixed feeders, the CT’s are mounted in downstream side of breaker as shown in
Image.
In Drawout feeders, the CT’s are mounted inside drawer. The CT’s chosen for
drawer enables to optimize the height of drawer.
BLK061002E 6-5
Power Control Center Accessories and cables
and Motor Control
Center
Overview
Connecting the circuit breakers NSX/NSXm up to 250 A - Connections by cables
The MCCB’s are connected to the vertical bars, with cable type NYAF at 105°C.
Rating Connections
NSX100/NSXm 100 Flexible cable 105°C - 750/1000 V(*) 25 mm²
NSX160/NSXm160 Flexible cable 105°C - 750/1000 V(*) 50 mm²
NSX250 Flexible cable 105°C - 750/1000 V(*) 95 mm²
(*) cable insulation voltage to be selected based on the insulation voltage of Device
to which it is connected.
Connection Methods & Accessories:
Connection method and mandatory accessories

Outgoing
Incoming (Load Side)
(Line Side)
Un < 500 V Connection

way to CB
Incoming
(Line Side) Outgoing
(Load Side)
NSXm160 Front of the CB Long terminal shield CABLES Long terminal shield CABLES
Long terminal shield CABLES
Front of the CB Long terminal shield CABLES BARE COPPER
NSX100/160/250 Long terminal shield
BAR
BARE COPPER
D Type Rear of the CB Short terminal shield CABLES Short terminal shield
BAR
BARE COPPER BARE COPPER
Front of the CB Long terminal shield Long terminal shield
BARS BAR
NSX400/630
Short terminal shield CABLES
BARE COPPER
Rear of the CB Short terminal shield BARE COPPER
BARS Short terminal shield
BAR
GV2 / GV3 Front of the CB n/a CABLES n/a CABLES

GV4 Front of the CB n/a CABLES n/a CABLES
Long terminal shield CABLES
Front of the CB Long terminal shield CABLES BARE COPPER
Long terminal shield
Mf and NSX100/160/250
BAR
Ms Type Short terminal shield CABLES
Rear of the CB Short terminal shield CABLES BARE COPPER
Short terminal shield
BAR
Front of the CB Long terminal shield BARE COPPER BAR Long terminal shield CABLES
NSX400/630
Rear of the CB Short terminal shield BARE COPPER BAR Short terminal shield CABLES
6-6 BLK061002E
Power Control Center Terminal shields
and Motor Control
Center
Overview
GV2/GV3 Front of the CB n/a CABLES n/a CABLES

GV4 Front of the CB n/a CABLES n/a CABLES
Front of the CB Long terminal shield CABLES
BARE COPPER
NSX100 BARE COPPER Phase barrier
Mw2 Rear of the CB Short terminal shield BARS
Type BARS
NSX160/250 BARE COPPER BARE COPPER
Rear of the CB Short terminal shield Phase barrier
/400/630 BARS BARS
NSX250/400/630 (with BARE COPPER BARE COPPER

Rear of the CB Short terminal shield n/a
Tesys Giga contactor)) BARS BARS
NSXm NSX100/250 NSX400/630
Long Terminal shield Ref. LV426912 LV429517 LV432593

3P
Short Terminal shield Ref. n/a LV429515 LV432591
Long Terminal shield Ref. LV426913 LV429518 LV432594
4P
Short Terminal shield Ref. n/a LV429516 LV432592
Connection Methods & Accessories:
500 < Un ≤ 690 V Connection way to CB Mandatory Accessories
SHORT TERMINAL SHIELD

Rear of the CB (Plug-in or
NSX100/250 3 P - REF.: LV429515
rear connector)
4 P - REF.: LV429516
525 V
NSX400/630 3 P - REF.: LV433683
rear connector)
4 P - REF.: LV433684

NSX100/250 3 P - REF.: LV429515
rear connector)
4 P - REF.: LV429516
690 V
NSX400/630 3 P - REF.: LV433683
rear connector)
4 P - REF.: LV433684
Note: For 690V orders contact Schneider Electric
BLK061002E 6-7
Power Control Center Earth Leakage protection
and Motor Control
Center
Overview
In Power control centers, there were two ways to add earth leakage protection to
any three or four-pole ComPacT NSX100 to 630 circuit breakers equipped with a
magnetic, thermal magnetic or Micrologic 2, 5 or 6 trip unit
Earth-leakage relay
b By adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker to form a Vigicompact NSX.
b By using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.
Vigicompact NSX 100 to 630
Separate toroids
Now power control centers can have earth leakage protection with new types of
micrologic embedded in the NSX MCCB’s
b The ComPacT NSX range is now complemented with a new type of Micrologic
trip unit including both circuit protection and earth leakage protection
b It means that the earth leakage protection, lately located within the Vigi Add-on,
will be embedded within the existing size of the Micrologic trip unit
b Earth leakage protection can be achieve with MCCB with Micrologic 4 &
Micrologic 7
Micrologic 4 A
6-8 BLK061002E
Power Control Center MCCB with motor mechanism in
and Motor Control PCC drawer
Center
Overview
Current Trans-
MCCB former Number Max
Type M.Mechanism
Position (CT) installation of poles IP
possibility
4M Through door Yes 3P/4P IP31
Behind door 3P/4P IP54
BLK061002E 6-9
Power Control Center MCCB with motor mechanism in
and Motor Control PCC drawer
Center
Overview
Current Trans-
MCCB former Number
Type M.Mechanism Max IP
Position (CT) installa- of poles
tion possibility
Note: For CR of Motor mechanism refer Compact NSX LV MCCB Catalogue.
6-10 BLK061002E
Power Control Center MCCB + Contactor for lighting
and Motor Control
Center
drawer
Overview
Each PCC drawer is equipped with a moulded case circuit breaker as an Incomer for voltage upto 415 V, fixed installed, with contactor,
Compact breakers upto 630 A is available in this offer.
Current
Contactor Transformer(CT) Drawer Number
Voltage(V) MCCB type Max IP
Type installation Module of poles
possibility
415 NSX100 LC1-D80 Yes 4M 4P IP54
LC1-D115
NSX160 LC1-D150 Yes 4M 4P IP54
NSX250 LC1-D150 Yes 6M 4P IP54
8M
NSX400 LC1-G150 Yes 10M 4P IP54
LC1-G185
LC1-G225
LC1-G265
NSX630 LC1-G330 Yes 10M 4P IP54
LC1-G400
BLK061002E 6-11
and Motor Control
Center
Overview
6-12 BLK061002E
Motor Control Center
Presentation 7-2
Choice criteria 7-2
Co-ordination 7-4
Classic Motor Starters 7-5

P y 250 kW 7-6
OK061010E 7-1
Motor Control Center Presentation
Choice criteria
Ue = 415 V
Overview
In addition to the motor power and the starter type (direct, reverse, star-delta), 4
main criteria have to be taken into account when choosing a motor starter:
b the operational voltage,
b the type of thermal protection, electro-mechanical or electronic,
b the type of magnetic protection, according to the switchboard’s Icc,
b the type of installation, according to the required availability level.
Operational voltage
The network’s operating voltage is a decisive parameter in the choice of motor
protection.
Indeed, the operational voltage will have an impact on the device’s performances
and the installation constraints.
For instance, the voltage will influence:
b the breaking performances,
b the safety areas.
Motor protection
Protecting the motors to extend their lifetime

b Overheating in electrical motors is caused by copper and ferro-magnetic losses:
DD405318
v the current I is proportional to the motor’s load. Copper losses are proportional
to I² (stator and rotor).
v hysteresis cycles in ferro-magnetic materials and the induced fault currents
cause overheating, which is in particular proportional to frequency.
b The consequence of abnormal overheatings is a reduced isolation capacity

of the materials, thus leading to a significant shortening of the motor lifetime, as
shown in the opposite diagram.
b In continuous or semi-continuous processes, availability is a major issue. It is

therefore decisive to accurately observe the operating conditions of the motors.
b Motor protection relays are the components dedicated to this task. They provide
various levels of accuracy and functionalities, in order to meet the expectations of
the process manager.
Temp (Kelvin)
Detailed supervision of motors to improve process availability
b An electrical motor transforms electrical energy in mechanical energy.

When the voltage, current and frequency change, the speed and torque of the
DD405340
motor change too. And conversely, any changes in charge have a direct impact on
the electrical parameters.
b Electromechanical thermal relays protect the motor against overloads.
b Electronic relays protect the motor against overloads, on the basis of very
sophisticated and highly accurate thermal patterns.
v These relays are able to make out several cases of motor overload,
and to transmit the information, thus allowing the operator to have a better
understanding of the true nature of the problem,
v These relays report for many complementary parameters, providing useful
informations to the operator, therefore giving the operator an opportunity to avoid
motor stops, or to re-start quickly if a stop has occurred.
v Examples:
- motor under-load can be the signal of a pump cavitation,
- phase inversion can be the indication of a maintenance error, that is hard to
diagnose without a sign.
Temp (Kelvin)
7-2 BLK061010E
Choice criteria
Overview
DD405342
v In addition to the observation of currents, the electronic relays can monitor the
voltage, and consequently the power and the power factor. They can also watch
the leakage currents and measure the actual coil temperature whenever it has a
built-in sensor.
This information give an additional level of anticipation and shrewdness to help
cope with problems.
v Finally, electronic relays can take on information-processing functions, like

state and faults statistics. They are also able to suggest logical solutions, and to
react in a process-specific way.
Short circuit protection: circuit-breakers and fuses

Schneider Electric have chosen to put forward circuit-breakers each time it is
possible, as they have advantages in terms of maintenance and capacity of quick
re-operating.
The advantages of magnetic circuit breakers over fuses are listed below:
b universal solution that can be exported to all countries, unlike the fuses, where
standards are not coordinated,
b reduced dimensions,
b limited temperature rise,
b faster maintenance,
b no risk of over-rating the fuse cartridge (causing the motor destruction) or under-
rating (untimely tripping).
BlokSeT: a combination for motor starter
TeSys U NSX 100

GV2 NSX 160
GV3 NSX 250
DD405580
GV4 NSX 400

NSX 630 Power supply
and network
Relay
LRD
TeSys T
LC1D LC1G
LC1F Feeder
BLK061010E 7-3
Coordination
Overview
Coordination, what is it about ?
A "motor feeder" can be made up of 1, 2, or 3 different devices. They have to be

DD383428
coordinated in a way they ensure an optimal installation operation.
Aims of coordination
In case of a fault, the coordination’s purposes are:

b to protect of the people and the equipment,
b to permit continuity of service,
b to reduce maintenance costs (manpower and replacement equipment).
Type 1 coordination
Types of coordination as per IEC 61947-4-1

DD383429
b Type 1 coordination: basic solution

v no continuity of service,
v important maintenance costs in case of a fault (manpower and equipment).
b Type 2 coordination: solution ensuring continuity of service

v reduced machine shutdown time,
v reduced cost of replacement equipment.
Type 2 coordination b Total coordination, as per IEC 61947-6-2:
v no damage nor resetting of devices following a fault,
v installation immediate return to operation.
DD383430
Total coordination
Schneider Electric choices regarding coordination
For applications in BlokSeT high availability switchboard, Schneider Electric has

accepted:
 type 2 or total coordination on grounds of:
b a low cost for repairing the equipment,
b a reduced machine shutdown time,
and dismissed:
 type 1 coordination and non-coordinated feeders because of:
b an expensive return to operation,
b a long machine shutdown time.
Main characteristics of devices
Characteristics Protection device

Tesys U GV2P GV3P GV4P GV2L GV3L GV4L NSX100-630
P range (kW) 0.06 to 18.5 0.06 to 22 15 to 30 0.18 to 55 0.06 to 22 11 to 37 0.18 to 55 0.37 to 250
Isc max (kA) 85 85 85 100 85 85 100 100
Thermal protection internal internal internal internal external external external external
Coordination Total 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Starters dol dol dol dol dol dol dol dol
reverse reverse reverse reverse reverse reverse reverse reverse
star-delta star-delta star-delta star-delta star-delta star-delta star-delta
7-4 BLK061010E
Motor Control Center Classic Motor Starters
Overview
1-component motor feeder Circuit breaker-contactor combination TeSys U

b Advantages
v easy installation:
- easy to order: 1 power base + 1 protection (control unit)
- easy to install: only one device must be wired, reduced installation times
- easy to set: locally via the LCD and keypad built into the control unit or
remotely
v continuity of service:
- total coordination between protection devices
- protection functions modified by simply changing the control unit
- manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault
v upgradeability: modular design. Functional modules (communication and
protection) can be easily changed at any time without having to rewire the entire
assembly.
b Applications
v manufacturing and continuous and semi-continuous processes.
Advantages of magnetic circuit breakers over fuses

b a
b Universal solution that can be exported to all countries.
b Reduced dimensions.
b Limited temperature-rise.
b Faster maintenance.
BLK061010E 7-5
Motor Control Center Panorama
Motor control solutions
in Mw2 cubicle
Overview
Withdrawable functional unit in drawer

for Mw2
Ue = 415 / 440 V
PD401013
MCC
3 components NSX100-630/GV4 LRD LRD
GV2/3 LRD
2 components GV2/3 GV P
1 component Tesys U LUC
kW 0.37 15 30 37 55 250
PD401014
Ue = 480 V
MCC
3 components NSX100-630/GV4 LRD LRD
GV2/3 LRD
2 components GV2/3 GV P
PD401015
kW 0.37 15 30 37 250
Ue = 690 V
MCC
3 components NSX100-630 LRD LRD
GV2 LRD
2 components GV GV2 P
kW 0.37 18.5 22 250
Possible solutions in BlokSeT Schneider Electric

switchboards recommended solutions
Note: All the above configurations are possible with Tesys contactors as per the
switchgear coordination tables.
7-6 BLK061011E
Motor Control Center Selection of functional unit
P y 250 kW
Overview
Example: Selection of the functional unit - MCC 2 components - rated 415 V - 50 / 60Hz - IP31 / 35 °C
Withdrawability Starter Circuit breaker Power (kW) Dimensions (1) (2) Cubicle (3)
min max
Drawer DOL GV2P 0 to 15 2M half 4M half
GV3P 18.5 to 30 4M half 4M full
Reverse GV2P 0 to 15 4M half 4M full
GV4P 0.18 to 55 3M full 6M full
Star-delta GV2P 0 to 15 4M full 4M full
Mw2
Example: Selection of the functional unit - MCC 3 components - rated 415 V - 50 / 60 Hz - IP31 / 35°C
Withdrawability Starter Circuit breaker or fuse Power (kW) Dimensions (1) (2) Cubicle (3)
min max
Drawer DOL GV2L 0 to 4 2M half 2M full
5.5 to 15 2M half 4M full
GV3L 18.5 to 30 2M full 4M full
GV4L 0.18 to 55 4M half 5M full
NSX100*MA 18.5 to 30 4M full 6M full
37 4M full 4M full
45 4M full 6M full
NSX160*MA 55 to 75 6M full 6M full
NSX630*MA 200 8M full 8M full
220 to 250 8M full 10M full
Reverse GV2L 0 to 15 4M half 4M full
37 to 45 6M full 8M full
Mw2
Star-delta GV2L 0 to 15 4M full 4M full
Example: Selection of the functional unit - MCC 1 component - rated 415 V - 50 / 60 Hz - IP31 / 35 °C
Withdrawability Starter Circuit breaker Power (kW) Dimensions (1) (2) Cubicle (3)
min max
Drawer DOL Tesys U 0 to 15 2M half 2M full
DOL Tesys U 0 to 15 4M half 4M half
Mw2
(1) Depending on additional equipments.

(2) In number of vertical modules (1 module = 50 mm).
(3) C100H and C100F drawer forbidden install on first top position of the cubicle.
For details on IP, Voltage, Icw and other breakers, please consult the co-ordination tables in technical transfer file.
BLK061011E 7-7
Motor Control Center Selection of functional unit
P y 250 kW
Overview
Example: Selection of the functional unit - MCC 3 components - rated 415 V - 50 / 60 Hz - IP31 / 35°C
Withdrawability Starter Circuit breaker or fuse Power (kW) Dimensions (1) (2) Cubicle
min max
Fixed DOL GV2 0.55 to 15 2M 2M
GV3 18.5 to 30 2M 2M
GV4 0.18 to 55 3M 4M
NSX100 18.5 to 37 3M 3M
45 4M 4M
NSX160 55 to 75 4M 4M
NSX250 90 to 110 9M 9M
NSX400 132 to 160 12M 12M
NSX630 200 to 250 12M 12M
Reverse GV2 0.55 to 15 3M 3M
GV3 18.5 to 30 4M 4M
GV4 0.18 to 55 4M 9M
NSX100 18.5 to 37 6M 6M
45 9M 9M
NSX160 55 to 75 9M 9M
Mf
NSX250 90 to 110 12M 12M
NSX400 132 to 160 16M 16M
NSX630 200 to 250 16M 16M
Star-delta GV2 0.55 to 15 4M 4M
GV3 18.5 to 30 5M 5M
GV4 0.18 to 55 4M 12M
NSX100 18.5 to 37 9M 9M
45 12M 12M
NSX160 55 to 75 12M 12M
NSX250 90 to 110 16M 16M
NSX400 132 to 160 16M 16M
NSX630 200 16M 16M
NSX630 220 to 250 20M 20M
(1) Depending on additional equipments.

(2) In number of vertical modules (1 module = 50 mm).
For details on IP, Voltage, Icw and other breakers, please consult the co-ordination tables in technical transfer file.
7-8 BLK061012E
Motor Control Center GV2P-GV3P-GV4P
MCC 1 components Mw2 drawer
Ue = 415 V WWW
0.06 to 18.5 kW
Selection
Installation rules
Mw2 drawers solutions include functional units equipped with:
b current transformers,
b auxiliary transformer,
b 24 or 48 auxiliary contacts
Functional unit description Half width drawer parts

Form 4 for rear
connection
Customer Form 4 for side

outgoing connection
Fixed Auxiliary
part connector
Power plugs
Moving Handle
part
Index Front
Full width drawer parts mechanism face
70-M drawers soltions include functional units Form 4 for rear

equipped with: connection
Customer
b Current transformers outgoing Form 4 for side
b auxiliary transformers connection
b 48 Auxiliary contact for other drawers
Downstream power
plug
Fixed part
Handle
Upstream power
plug Auxiliary connector
Moving part
Front face
Index mechanism
Example of functional unit Scheme Dimensions

Ue = 415 V - IP31/35 °C 2M/2 2M 3M/2 3M 4M/2 4M 5M
Direct on line
Reverse
BLK061020E 7-9
Ue = 415 V WWW
Selection
Installation rules
b 24 or 48 auxiliary contacts

Half width drawer parts
Form 4 for rear
connection

outgoing connection
Fixed Auxiliary
part connector
Power plugs
Moving Handle
part
Index Front
mechanism face
Full width drawer parts

70-M drawers soltions include functional units Form 4 for rear
equipped with: connection
Customer
b Current transformers outgoing Form 4 for side
b auxiliary transformers connection
Downstream power
plug
Fixed part
Handle
Upstream power
plug Auxiliary connector
Moving part
Front face
Index mechanism
7-10 BLK061020E
Ue = 415 V WWW
Selection
Example of functional units : Ue = 415 V - IP42 / 35°C
GV2P - GV3P, 0.25 to 30 kW
Scheme Dimensions
2M/2 2M 3M/2 3M 4M/2 4M 5M 6M
Direct on line
Reverse
Star-Delta
GV4P, 0.18 to 55kW

Scheme Dimensions
4M ½ 3M 4M 5M 6M 7M
Direct on line
Reverse
Star-Delta
BLK061020E 7-11
Motor Control Center GV2L-GV3L-GV4L
MCC 3 components NSX100-630
Ue = 415 V Mw2 drawer
Selection
WWW
Installation rules
PD401006
b 24 or 48 auxiliary contacts.

Form 4 for rear
connection
Customer
outgoing Form 4 for side
connection
Fixed Auxiliary
part connector
Power plugs
Moving Handle
part
Index Front
70-M drawers soltions include functional units Full width drawer parts mechanism face
equipped with: Form 4 for rear
b Current transformers connection
b auxiliary transformers Customer
b 24 Auxiliary contact for C100H drawer outgoing Form 4 for side
b 48 Auxiliary contact for other drawers connection
Downstream power
plug
Fixed part
Upstream power Handle

plug
Auxiliary connector
Moving part
Front face
Index mechanism
7-12 BLK061030E
Motor Control Center GV2L-GV3L-GV4L
MCC 3 components NSX100-630
Ue = 415 V Mw2 drawer
Selection
WWW
Example of functional unit: Ue = 415 V - IP42 / 35°C
GV2L - GV3L, 0.25 to 30 kW
Scheme Dimensions
2M/2 2M 3M/2 3M 4M/2 4M 5M 6M 7M 8M
Direct on line
Reverse
Y/D
GV4P, 0.18 to 55kW
Scheme Dimensions
4M ½ 3M 4M 5M 6M 7M
Direct on line
Reverse
Star-Delta
NSX100-630, 0.37 to 250 kW
Scheme Dimensions
2M/2 2M 3M/2 3M 4M/2 4M 5M 6M 7M 8M 9M 10M 11M 12M
Direct on line
Reverse
Star-Delta
BLK061030E 7-13
Motor Control Center TeSys U
MCC 1 component Mw2 drawer
Ue = 415V WWW
0.37 to 15 kW
Installation rules
PD401013

Form 4 for rear
connection

outgoing connection
Fixed Auxiliary
part connector
Power plugs
Moving Handle
part
Index Front
70-M drawers soltions include functional units Full width drawer parts mechanism face
equipped with: Form 4 for rear
b Current transformers connection
Customer
b auxiliary transformers
outgoing Form 4 for side
connection
Downstream power
plug
Fixed part
Upstream power Handle

plug
Auxiliary connector
Moving part
Front face
Index mechanism
Example of functional unit Scheme Dimensions

Ue = 415 V - IP31 / 35°C 2M/2 2M 3M/2 3M 4M/2 4M 5M
Direct on line
Reverse
7-14 BLK061040E
BlokSeT IPMCC
iPMCC by BlokSeT 8-2
iPMCC by BlokSeT 8-3

Additional functions 8-3
iPCC by BlokSeT 8-5
iMCC by BlokSeT 8-8
Panorama 8-11
Intelligent Motor control solutions
in Mw2 cubicle 8-11
BLK061050E 8-1
iPMCC by BlokSeT iPMCC by BlokSeT
Overview
BlokSeT solutions
2 solutions are available in BlokSeT:
b Basic BlokSeT, based on devices without any communications.
Functional units provide the basics functions: protection, local control and
signaling, … Devices are a part of the electrical network architecture,
b iPMCC by BlokSeT : The intelligent Power and Motor Control Centres.
Beyond the basic functions, iPMCC by BlokSeT adds a lot of possibilities to help
the end-user in the maintenance and the exploitation of his electrical installation.
With their communication devices, the functional units become intelligent and are
part of an up-to worldwide communication architecture:
b iPCC is based on communicating circuit breakers,
b iMCC is based on communicating relays (Tesys U, Tesys T) and motor control
devices (ATS, ATV).
Example of organization: from the

functional unit to the Cloud
iPCC iMCC
MasterPact MasterPact ComPacT NSX TeSys U TeSysT ATV320 ATV630 ATS 48

MTZ2/NW + MTZ1/NT+ + Micrologic ATV930
Micrologic Micrologic
PB106363A35
PB106367A24
FU FU FU FU
FU interface FU interface FU interface FU interface
interface interface interface interface
Cubicle interface Cubicle interface Cubicle interface
Switchboard interface Switchboard interface PLC, software
Site interface
CLOUD
8-2 BLK061050E
Additional functions
Overview
BlokSeT smart communication devices

Name Function Port
to device to server
IFE interface Ethernet Modbus Ethernet
interface & master & ULP
Gateway
IFM Modbus interface ULP Modbus

for circuit breaker Slave
I/O Input / output ULP ULP

application
module for circuit
breaker
LTM9BPS Ethernet By-pass

switch
Managed / TCSESMxxx Ethernet

unmanaged TCSEUxxx switches
switches
TCSESMxxx TCSESUxxx
PLC M580, Programmable
M340, Logic
Quantum, Controller
xxx
PF122583
Measurement PM800 Power Meters
devices PM5000
PE86158 PB111768
BLK061050E 8-3
Additional functions
Overview
Communication devices and displays

(contd.)
Com'X 200 Energy server
Features
b Com'X 200 collects data from any Modbus TCP or serial devices, from any pulse
meters, actuators and analogue sensors.
b Connectivity to the cloud through Ethernet, Wi-Fi and GPRS.
b 2 Ethernet ports to separate upstream cloud connection from field devices
network.
b Protocols: HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SMTP with Proxy management.
b Compliant with electrical switchboard environment (Temperature, electro
magnetic compatibility).
b Remotely managed (firmware upgrade, configuration backup, troubleshooting,
parameters setting.
Service offer
Power Outage Insight Solution (POIS) provides 24/7 reliable access to safe
electricity.
b Energy increase power availability:
v prevent unwanted fault, and display diagnostic
v reduce time to repair (MTTR).
b Provide power maintenance diagnostics
v scheduled maintenance operations and traceability.
Power Outage Insight Solution b Improve maintenance staff safety
v tests short circuit before recovering power
v wireless closing control.
8-4 BLK061050E
iPMCC by BlokSeT iPCC by BlokSeT
Overview
iPCC by BlokSeT - a range of intelligent Power Control Centre solutions
The PCC when equipped with communicating options, becomes iPCC (intelligent
Power Control Centre).
iPCC includes the electrical distribution devices equipped with the communication
options like Micrologic and Breaker Communication modules connected to
interfaces.
These interfaces are connected to the backbone with recommended
communication topologies and protocols.
Built-in communication protocols:

b Modbus (TCP and SL)
b Ethernet
Backbone
Managed switch Multi-ring managed switches
Star
Star Star + Proxy ETG1000
Daisy Chain Loop

+ Proxy ETG3000
Daisy Chain Loop

+ By-pass Switches
Daisy Chain Loop

+ By-pass Switches
For further information, please consult document iPMCC by BlokSeT solution

guide, reference DESWED114003EN.
Functional unit equipment Electrical distribution y 630 A
In an iPCC functional unit, ComPacT NSX needs some additional function:

b Micrologic A or E,
b the Breaker Communication Module,
b the contacts of position + I/O module if required (drawout device).
Upstream connection can be:

b Ethernet via the Ethernet interface IFE,
b Modbus via the Modbus interface IFM.
The connection from ComPacT to I/O module or the IFE and IFM modules is done
with the NSX cord.
The connection from I / O module to IFE and IFM interfaces are done with the
Universal Logic Plug system (ULP).
Electrical distribution u 630 A
In an iPCC functional unit, MasterPact MTZ1,2,3, / NW,NT and ComPacT NS need

some additional function:
b Micrologic A, E, P or H for MasterPact MTZ1,2,3, / NW and NT
b the Breaker Communication Module,
b the contacts of position + I/O module if required (drawout device).
Upstream connection can be:

b Ethernet via the Ethernet interface IFE,
b Modbus via the Modbus interface IFM.
The connection from MasterPact to I/O module and from I/O module to IFE and
IFM interfaces are done with the Universal Logic Plug system (ULP).
BLK061051E 8-5
Electrical distribution y 630 A
Overview
Hardware architecture
Fixed ComPacT NSX circuit breaker Drawout ComPacT NSX circuit breaker
CE, CD and CT
contacts
MX 1 or XF
communicating
voltage releases
Micrologic trip unit
Breaker ULP cord
I / O module
IFE interface module
IFM module
MX1/XF
CE
CE
MX1/XF CD CT
CD CT
8-6 BLK061051E
Electrical distribution u 630 A
Overview
Hardware architecture
Fixed MasterPact air circuit breaker Drawout MasterPact air circuit breaker
BCM ULP
OF, SDE...
microswitches
COM terminal block
(E1 to E6)
MX 1 and XF
communicating
voltage releases
CE, CD and CT
contacts
Micrologic trip unit
Breaker ULP cord
I / O module
IFE interface module
IFM module
BLK061051E 8-7
iPMCC by BlokSeT iMCC by BlokSeT
Overview
iMCC by BlokSeT - a range of intelligent Motor Control Centre solutions
The Motor Control Centers when equipped with communicating options, becomes
iMCC (intelligent Motor Control Centre).
The range of homogeneous and consistent solutions offered by BlokSeT

smart panel simplifies the choice of iMCC. iMCC includes all intelligent and
communicating motor management devices like TeSys U, Tesys T, Altivar and
Altistart connected to the backbone with recommended communication topologies
and protocols.
BlokSeT is open to all major fieldbuses used in large industrial and infrastructure
sites.
Built-in communication protocols (native):

b Modbus / TCP
b Modbus SL
b Profibus DP
b DeviceNet
b Ethernet IP.
Backbone
Managed switch Multi-ring managed switches
Star
Star Star + Proxy ETG1000
Daisy Chain Loop

+ Proxy ETG3000
Daisy Chain Loop

+ By-pass Switches
Daisy Chain Loop

+ By-pass Switches
For further information, please consult iPMCC by BlokSeT solution guide,

reference DESWED114003EN.
8-8 BLK061150E
Overview
iMCC by BlokSeT solutions adapted for highly demanding processes, 2 types of intelligent relays
1 - Critical feeders will receive the TeSys T relay.

PF106605_I_SE
b It offers a whole range of current-based protections
b TeSys T offers the measurement of ground currents and temperature by sensor
b It has logic processing capacities, including the automatic restarting of motors
b Optionally, the whole set of voltage- and power-based protections are also
available.
TeSys T is installed in the withdrawable drawer.

LTMRl LTME b The LTMCU unit is dedicated exclusively to TeSys T controllers, it makes it
possible to:
v configure the parameters of the LTMR08 - 100 controller
v display information on controller configuration and operation
v monitor the alarms and faults generated by the controller
DD405808
PF108029
v local control of the motor via the local control interface (keys can be
customized)
b Three different languages can be loaded into the LTMCU controller at the same
time (English, French, Spanish).
b The LTMCU unit has an RJ45 port, protected by a flexible cover to provide a
good level of protection (IP54).
This port on the front panel allows connection to a PC, via a connecting cable, in
LTMCU
order to use PowerSuite software.
RJ45
2 - Non-critical feeders will receive the TeSys U relay.

PB108208-Tesys U
b a whole range of current-based protections.

b up to 15kW, benefits from the compacity and simplicity of TeSys U “all-in-one”
with a LUCM protection relay.
PD391103
b The LCDD - the TeSys T HMI is:

v local-control and indication unit for a single motor feeder
v LEDs indicate feeder status and signal any operating faults (thermal, overload,
LUBl etc.)
v a three-position switch can turn off PLC control for local control:
-- for example, to test the settings of the feeders if the system is being
expanded, to carry out no-load tests following maintenance, etc.
LUBl LCDD It is mounted on a bracket (disconnectable mounting plate) or on the front face
(drawer).
A removable, transparent cover is clipped to the front to protect the labels.
iMCC by BlokSeT solutions based on variable speed drives and soft starters
A range of variable speed drives and soft starters for effortless variable speed
control offering extensive power, application and protection options for the entire
installation (drive, motor, machine, environment).
Altivar Process, Altivar 320, 630, 930 and Altistart 480

b A perfect match whatever your requirements - simple machines, pumping and
ventilation machines, high power machines.
b Power and energy measurement and power quality control.
b Sub-metering and cost allocation.
b Optimum demand and power factor management.
b Load analysis and circuit optimisation.
Altivar ATV630, ATV930 Altivar ATV320
Altistart ATS480
BLK061150E 8-9
Overview
BlokSeT - Ethernet By-pass Switch LTM9BPS
The self-healing daisy chain loop

PB110223
In order to get all the benefits of the Daisy Chain Loop (DCL) with 2 ring switches,
the sub-system must be able to "self-heal" after removal of any Functional Unit
(FU).
This can be achieved by installing, outside the drawer, a device that will close the
loop shortly after removal of a drawer. We call this device a "By-pass switch".
When the drawer is in its place and connected, the by-pass switch is "open", letting
communications unchanged.
When the drawer is withdrawn, the by-pass switch is "closed", allowing
communications to by-pass the removed FU.
The opening and the closing of the by-pass switch is automatically executed when
the position of the FU changes.
1-component motor feeder

Circuit breaker-contactor combination TeSys U
b Advantages
v easy installation:
- easy to order: 1 power base + 1 protection (control unit)
- easy to install: only one device must be wired, reduced installation times
- easy to set: locally via the LCD and keypad built into the control unit or
remotely
v continuity of service:
- total coordination between protection devices
- protection functions modified by simply changing the control unit
- manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault
v upgradeability: modular design. Functional modules (communication and
protection) can be easily changed at any time without having to rewire the entire
assembly.
b Applications
v manufacturing and continuous and semi-continuous processes.
3-component motor feeder

DD405660
Advantages
b Wide choice of solutions.
b Suitable for all types of diagrams.
b Manual or automatic reset following a thermal fault.
b 2 starting classes (10 and 20).
b Type 2 coordination.
b Segregation of thermal and magnetic faults.
Magnetic circuit-breaker + contactor + thermal protection

b For manufacturing and continuous and semi-continuous processes.
8-10 BLK061150E
iPMCC by BlokSeT Panorama
Intelligent Motor control solutions
in Mw2 cubicle
Overview
Example: Withdrawable functional unit in drawer

for Mw2
Ue = 415 / 440 V
PD401013
iMCC
3 components NSX100-630 LTMR LTMR
GV4
GV2/3 LTMR
PD401014
kW 0.37 15 30 37 55 250
Ue = 480 V
iMCC
PD401015
3 components NSX100-630 LTMR LTMR
GV LTMR
kW 0.37 15 30 37 250
Ue = 690 V
iMCC
3 components GV2 LTMR
kW 0.37 18.5 22 250
Possible solutions in BlokSeT Schneider Electric

switchboards recommended solutions
Note : All the above configurations are possible with Tesys contactors as per the
switchgear corrdination tables.
BLK061150E 8-11
Notes
Variable speed drives
and soft starters
Introduction 9-2
Soft starters 9-2
Variable speed drives 9-3
Variable speed drives 9-4
Choice optimization 9-5
Fixed soft starter 9-7

ATS480 9-7
Fixed variable speed drive 9-9

ATV320 9-9
Fixed variable speed drive 9-10

ATV630/ATV930 9-10
Functional unit description Altivar Process 630/930

Size 7 9-12
Withdrawable variable speed drive 9-13

ATV630/ATV930 9-13
OK063010E 9-1
Variable speed drives Introduction
and soft starters
Soft starters
Overview
Uses of soft starters

During motor start-up, there is an *inrush/surge current and mechanical stresses
imposed on the electrical motors.
A motor soft starter is used with AC electrical motors to temporarily reduce the load
and torque and electrical current surge, during start-up.
Soft starters help extend the lifespan of the system by reducing:
b the mechanical stress on the motor and shaft
b the electrodynamic stresses on the attached power cables and electrical
distribution network.
* inrush/surge current: Instantaneous input current drawn by an electrical device

when first turned on.
Altistart ATS 480

The Altistart 48 soft start - soft stop unit is a controller with 6 thyristors, which is
used for the torque-controlled soft starting and stopping of three-phase squirrel
cage asynchronous motors.
106761SE
The Altistart 48 must be selected on the basis of 3 main criteria:

b the power supply voltage range (this catalogue deals only with the devices
connected to a 415 V or 690 V network),
b the power and the nominal current of the motor,
b the type of application and the operating cycle.
To simplify selection, the applications are divided in 2 types:

b Standard applications:
The Altistart 48 is designed to provide:
v starting at 4 In for 23 seconds or at 3 In for 46 seconds from a cold state,
Altistart ATS 480 v starting at 3 In for 23 seconds or at 4 In for 12 seconds with a load factor of
50 % and 10 starts per hour or any equivalent thermal cycle
Example : centrifugal pump.
b Severe applications:
The Altistart 48 is designed to provide:
v starting at 4 In for 48 seconds or at 3 In for 90 seconds from a cold state,
v starting at 4 In for 25 seconds with a load factor of 50 % and 5 starts per hour or
any equivalent thermal cycle.
Example : grinder.
Line choke (optional)

14567
b The use of line chokes is recommended in particular when installing several

electronic starters on the same line supply.
b The values of the chokes are defined for a voltage drop between 3% and 5% of
the nominal line voltage.
b Install the line choke between the line contactor and the starter.
Line choke
Corrosive atmospheres
Soft starters cannot be used in corrosive atmospheres.
9-2 BLK063010E
and soft starters
Overview

Variable speed drives are used in electro-mechanical drive systems, to control AC
motor speed and torque, by varying motor input frequency and voltage.
They are used in applications ranging from small appliances to the largest of mine
mill drives and compressors.
Altivar ATV, 630, 930 and 320

They have been designed for the following main applications:
ATV630 ATV320 ATV930
Altivar, ATV630, ATV930 Altivar ATV320
Oil & Gas Water & Wastewater
Food & Beverage Mining, Minerals & Metal
BLK063010E 9-3
and soft starters
Overview
Braking resistor
b The braking resistor enables the drive to operate while braking to a standstill, by
dissipating the braking energy.
105659
It enables maximum transient braking torque.

b The resistors are designed to be mounted on the outside of the enclosure, but
should not inhibit natural cooling.
Air inlets and outlets must not be obstructed in any way.
b The air must be free of dust, corrosive gas and condensation.
Application example: Inertia machines
Line choke (optional)
Braking resistor A line choke can be used to provide improved protection against overvoltages on
the line supply and to reduce harmonic distortion of the current produced by the
drive.
FP107532
Application examples :
The use of line chokes is recommended in particular under the following
circumstances:
b close connection of several drives in parallel,

b line supply with significant disturbance from other equipment (interference,
overvoltages),
b line supply with voltage imbalance between phases above 1.8% of the nominal
voltage,
b drive supplied by a line with very low impedance (in the vicinity of power
transformers 10 times more powerful than the drive rating),
b installation of a large number of frequency inverters on the same line,
b reducing overloads on the cos ϕ correction capacitors, if the installation includes
a power factor correction unit.
Line choke
Corrosive atmospheres In standard atmospheres, the variable speed drivers comply with the IEC 721-3-3 standard
(3C1 and 3C2).
In corrosive atmospheres (H2S, SO2), they comply with the IEC 721-3-3 standard (3SC2 maxi)
if ordered with the additional catalogue number S337.
9-4 BLK063010E
Variable speed drives Choice optimization
and soft starters
Overview
Optimizing the choice of the devices associated to ATS480

DD405572
A Line contactor
The line contactor (A) allows power to be connected to the starter, that can also
be performed by the ATS soft starter or the ATV variable speed drive. This line
contactor is therefore optional: it has to be installed only on explicit customer
request.
By-pass contactor for ATS soft starters

B
The by-pass contactor (B) allows to by-pass the starter at the end of the starting,
while keeping the electronic protections.
As a consequence, a less expensive starter can be used.
Device Variable speed drives and Soft starters

ATV630 / 930 ATV320 ATS480
fixed withdrawable fixed fixed
415 V l l l l
690 V l - l l
BLK063020E 9-5
Variable speed drives Selection of functional unit
and soft starters
Selection
Example: Soft starter - example of configuration at 415 V

Withdrawability Switchgears Power (kW) Circuit breaker Modularity Cubicle
(1M=50 mm)
Fixed mounting plate ATS 480 5.5 to 15 GV2 9M
FFF 18.5 to 22 GV4 9M
30 to 55 GV4 12M
75 NSX160 18M
90 NSX250 18M
110 NSX 250 24M
132 to 160 NSX 400 24M
220 to 250 NSX 630 36M
Ms

Withdrawability Voltage Switchgears Power (kW) Circuit breaker Modularity Cubicle
(1M = 50 mm)
Fixed mounting plate < 500 V 0.75 to 5.5 GV2 6
FFF 0.15 to 5.5 GV4 6
1.5 to 11 GV2 8
7.5 to 22 GV3 12
3 to 22 GV4 12
ATV630 / ATV930 GV2
22 to 45 GV3 18
NSX100
6 to 45 GV4 18
11 to 45 GV4 24
45 to 75 NSX100-160 24
90 NSX250 28
100 to 160 NSX400 32
Ms
< 500 V ATV320 0.37 to 4 GV2 5
5.5 GV2 8
7.5 GV3 8
(without braking
11,w 15 GV3 12
resistor)
< 500 V ATV630 / ATV930
200-220 NSX250 / NSX400
250 NSX400/630 40M (Dedicated

cubicle)
(without braking 280-315 NS800

resistor)
Drawer < 500 V
WWW ATV630 / ATV930 0.75 to 5.5 GV2 6
0.15 to 5.5 GV4 6
7.5 to 11 GV2 8
1.5 to 11 GV4 8
15 to 22 GV3 12
3 to 22 GV4 12 Mw2
9-6 BLK063030E
Variable speed drives Fixed soft starter
and soft starters ATS480
Selection
Installation rules
The fixed soft starter functional units are mounted in a specific Ms cubicle.
A vertical busbar at the side/rear of the cubicle provides power through cables.
Functional units are designed to accept the auxiliary transformer.
The use of a bypass contactor, avoids the need for fans (forced ventilation with
cut-out doors).
Back partition
Fan
Fixed plate
Grid
Front door
ATV320 is only available for operating voltages, Ue ≤ 500 V.
Example of functional unit modularity: Ue ≤ 500 V - IP42 / 35°C
GV2L- GV3L , 0.37 to 15 kW (Without Braking resistor) GV2L- GV3L , 0.37 to 15 kW (With Braking resistor)
P (kW) 0.37 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 P (kW) 0.37 4 5.5 7.5 11 15

GV2L 5M 8M GV2L 9M 10M
GV3L 8M 12M GV3L 10M 12M 16M
For more detailed information on variable speed drives, at different voltage,

temperature and IP, refer the coordination tabels in the technical transfer file.
BLK063030E 9-7
Variable speed drives Fixed soft starter
and soft starters ATS480
Selection
Example of functional unit modularity: Ue = 415 V - IP42 / 35°C

DD405569.eps
GV2 / GV4, 5.5 to 55 kW

P (kW) 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
GV2 9M
GV4 9M
GV4 12M
NSX100-630, 75 to 250 kW
P (kW) 75 90 110 132 160 220 250

NSX160 18M
NSX250 18M
NSX400 24M
NSX630 36M

9-8 BLK063030E
Variable speed drives Fixed variable speed drive
and soft starters ATV320
Selection
Installation rules
The fixed variable speed drive functional units are mounted in a dedicated Ms
cubicle.
Functional units are designed to accept the auxiliary transformer.
Each functional unit is equipped with fans to avoid an excessive internal

temperature.
Back partition
Fan
Fixed plate
Grid
Front door
ATV320 is only available for operating voltages, Ue ≤ 600 V.

GV2L- GV3L , 0.37 to 7.5 kW
P (kW) 0.37 1.5 5.5 7.5 11 15

6M
GV2L 9M
12M
GV3L 12M

BLK063010E 9-9
and soft starters ATV630/ATV930
Selection
Installation rules
New ATV fixed.eps
Ms fixed functional units can be equipped with:

Each functional unit is equipped with fans to avoid an excessive internal

temperature.
NOTE:
1) 690V installation available in "C" Frame. Other voltages are available in "U" frame.
2) ATV size 6 is available in"C" Frame.
Fans
Fixed plate
Grids
Front door
9-10 BLK063010E
Selection
Example: ATV630/ATV930 is only available for operating voltages, Ue ≤ 690 V.

GV2L - GV3L, 0.75 to 30 kW
P (kW) 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30

GV2L 6M
8M
12M
GV3L 12M
18M
NSX100-400, 45 to 315 kW
P (kW) 45 55 75 90 160 200-315

NSX100 18M
NSX160 24M
NSX250 28M
NSX400 32M
40M
NS800

BLK063010E 9-11
Variable speed drives Functional unit description Altivar
and soft starters Process 630/930 Size 7
Selection
Frame 7A Frame 7B
3-phase 380...480 V, 220kW, 350 HP 3-phase 380...480 V, 220 and 315kW, 400 and 500 HP
Frame size 7A Frame size 7B
ATV630C22N4 ATV630C25N4
ATV930C22N4 ATV630C31N4
ATV930C25N4
ATV930C31N4
Cubicle dimensions - C frame Cubicle dimensions - U frame

Width - 600 + 400 Width - 1200+400
Depth - 600 / 1000 / 1200* (double front) Depth - 600 / 1000 / 1200* (double front)
* The rear portion of cubicle to be kept empty ( do not install any devices)
* Refer Altivar Process Drives catalogue for detailed & mandatory information
NOTE:
1) Use proper cable sizes as per "Altivar Process Variable Speed Drives ATV6000/9000" for ensure recommended thermal
performance.
2) Overall height of ATV S7 solution is 2200+150 mm ( 2200 - ATV column, 150- Ventilation hood height).
3) ATV630/930 Size 7 complies with Ics=100kA ( upto 440V) and Ics=70kA (480V).
4) ATV630/930 Size 7 solutions are available with Top HBB option. Use trasferbus option to couple with Bottom HBB cubicles.
5) ATV630/930 Size 7 solutions can be installed as standalone columns without HBB , Feeder customer connections Type 6,7
and drive customer connection at bottom.
6) Complies to corrosive ambient as per BlokSeT specifications.Do not complies with Seismic & Marine conditions.
9-12 BLK063010E
Variable speed drives Withdrawable variable speed drive
Selection
Installation rules
Mw2 drawers functional units can be equipped with:
New ATV-drawer.eps
Each drawer is equipped with fans to avoid an excessive internal temperature.
70-M drawers soltions include functional units

equipped with:
b Current transformers Auxiliary contacts
b auxiliary transformers
Eclate New ATV-drawer.eps
Power connectors
Moving parts
Front face
Index mechanism
Handle
BLK063010E 9-13
Variable speed drives Withdrawable variable speed drive
Selection
ATV630/ATV930 is only available for operating voltages, Ue ≤ 500 V.

GV4, 1.5 to 22 kW
P (kW) 0.15 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
GV4 6M
8M
12M

9-14 BLK063010E
Enclosures
General presentation 10-3

Panelling 10-9
Panelling 10-13
IP summary 10-13
BLK080010E 10-1
Enclosures General presentation
Overview
BlokSeT cubicles are available in

1 standard height, 8 widths and 3 depths,
in order to fit in any environment and allow
an optimal installation modularity.
All the cubicles are either painted /

galvanised steel, and the panelling
elements are always painted RAL 9003.
Specific frameworks equipments complete

the standard range of products, to adapt
BlokSeT cubicles to special environmental
constraints: siesmic areas, corrosive
atmospheres etc.
10-2 BLK080010E
Overview
Frameworks
cross-member cross ventilation piece
U Type Frame
b BlokSeT cubicles are made of side frames, horizontal cross-members, cross
ventilation pieces and transportation plinths forming a shock-resistant and rigid
frame assembly.
frame
DD405619
C Type Frame
b Framework is made with steel.
b The vertical parts of the frame are painted RAL9003.
b Its robustness is given by its ‘C’ shape and bolted architecture.
b The framework is pre-drilled with a pitch of 25 mm.
DD401038
b The framework is assembled with angle-square parts (supplied with framework

parts).
ba
BLK080010E 10-3
Overview
Angle columns
Angle columns are used to connect two columns of the switchboard and they can
600
be applied for following configurations:
b Connection between 600 mm depth switchboard
b Single horizontal busbar (up to 4000 A) or double horizontal busbar (up to 6300
A), top or bottom position.
b 85/100 kA
b IP 20, 31, 42 and 54.
For information concerning assembly, refer to the Assembly Guide in TTF.
800
600
800
122.5
455
12.2
25
25 455 122.5
10-4 BLK080010E
Overview
Column for double front connection

b The double front frameworks are available with a current capacity upto 7000 A.
b The positioning of the horizontal busbar is either top or bottom.
For details on load balancing, refer pages on Equipotential link, “Electrical and
mechanical data”, page 2-3.
100 100
500
500 500
2000 2000
100 100
200 700
700 600
400
400
Page 1-57
BLK080010E 10-5
Overview
Recommendations for coupling column with double or single horizontal busbar at the bottom.
b To facilitate the interconnection between columns, we recommend to avoid the
assembly of the double horizontal busbar at the bottom.
b If the incoming power cables are coming through the top, we recommend to
assemble the horizontal busbar on top, and make all the incoming /outgoing cables
through the rear extension frame.
b Use the rear extension frame to connect customer cables through top.
LATERAL VIEW LATERAL VIEW
600 mm 400/600 mm 600 mm 400/600 mm

(400/600 mm) Only the cubicles containing
the Masterpact need this depth (1000/1200 mm)
Others do not need it.
TOP VIEW
1000/1200 mm
D D
600 mm
Mf Ms
Incoming Outgoing
The images are examples with double busbars at the bottom, but are valid for
single horizontal busbar also.
Front View
1200 400 200 700 200 700 700
Other Cubicles
MTZ3/ D
NW 40b/ B
50/63
C C
A
Zone Rules to be followed

It is recommend to use front access solution (600 mm depth) with cable compartment
A 200/400 mm and horizontal busbar at the bottom.
If necessary to use lower horizontal busbar, keep a lateral extension frame of 400 mm in order to facilitate the
B interconnection of the bars between columns.
C If not possible to keep the extension frame of 400 mm, keep an empty space on the column, of at least 8 modules
D If necessary, raise the busbar up to the top position using transfer vertical busbar.
10-6 BLK080010E
Overview
Measurement/Protection compartment
General solution
These compartments are available for metering or protection devices (ammeter,
voltmeter, SEPAM, etc...). The SEPAM 2000 is possible only in 330 mm depth.
b Modules 4 and 6 are possible in a depth of 180 mm only
b Modules 8, 9 and 12 are possible in depths of 180 mm and 330 mm.
Metering/Protection compartment
Specific solution for 3P NW/MTZ2 breakers
This is a standard solution that has to be used in case of a 3 pole breaker MTZ2 /
NW08 to NW40 .
(*) 180 mm depth only
Metering/Protection compartment
BLK080010E 10-7
Panelling
Overview
D, Mf and Ms cubicles panelling Panelling elements for BlokSeT switchboards: roof, rear and side panels, bottom
plate, column caps, IP31 grids or IP42 front plates, plain or glassed doors, drawers
front faces.
lifting rings
lifting rings
roof side panel
rear panel
ventilation
grid
4M compartment
door
0
08 HA1 12kV
NX Uimp
V
Ui 1000
(V)
Ue
690
/1s
50kA
50/60Hz
NBMA
AS
947-2 UNE
IEC60947-2 CEI
EN VDE BS
UTE
ct II
terpa
mas
IN GERIN
MERL
side panel ventilation grid
10-8 BLK080010E
Panelling
Overview
Mw2 Cubicles panelling Panelling elements for BlokSeT switchboards: roof, rear and side panels, bottom
DD401043
plate, column caps, IP31 grids or IP42 front plates, plain or glassed doors, drawers
front faces.
lifting rings
lifting rings roof
side panels
rear panels
ventilation grid
side panels
4M compartment
door
ventilation grid side compartment

door
BLK080020E 10-9
Panelling
Overview
Colours and protection coating

b Colour RAL 7016 for:
v ventilation grids
RAL 7016
b Galvanised steel for:
DD3819232
v the inside equipment (device installations, plates, partitioning, forms, door

brackets,...)
galvanised b BlokSeT panelling elements are painted RAL 9003

steel
RAL 9003
Cubicles degree of protection

Standard of reference: IEC60529.
DD405039
IP options available in BlokSeT are IP20/31/42/54.
1st characteristic numeral: corresponds to protection of equipment against penetration of 2nd characteristic numeral: corresponds to protection
solid objects and protection of persons against direct contact with live parts. of equipment against penetration of water with harmful
effects.
Protection of equipment Protection of persons Protection of equipment
Non-protected Non-protected
0 Non-protected
0
Protected against the penetration Protected against direct contact with

1 Protected against vertical dripping
1
DD210006
DD210014
of solid objects having a diameter the back of the hand (accidental water (condensation)
greater than or equal to 50 mm contact)
Protected against the penetration Protected against direct finger contact

2 Protected against dripping water at a
2
DD210007
DD210015
of solid objects having a diameter maximum angle of 15°

greater than or equal to 12.5 mm

3 Protected against rain at a maximum
3
DD210008
DD210016
of solid objects having a diameter a 2.5 mm diameter tool angle of 60°

greater than or equal to 2.5 mm

4 Protected against splashing water in
4
DD210017
DD210009
of solid objects having a diameter a 1 mm diameter wire all directions

greater than or equal to 1 mm
Dust protected (no harmful deposits) Protected against direct contact with
5 Protected against water jets in all
5
DD210010
DD210018
a 1 mm diameter wire directions
IK performance
IK Weight (kg) Height (cm) Energy (J)
DD210533
00 Non-protected
01 0.20 7.50 0.15
02 10 0.20
03 17.50 0.35
04 25 0.50
05 35 0.70
06 0.50 20 1
07 40 2
08 1.70 30 5
09 5 20 10
10 40 20
10-10 BLK080021E
Enclosures Panelling
IP summary
Overview
D, Mf, Ms and Mw2 cubicles
Common parts
16
19
19
23
20
19 1
18
2
1
7
15 15
21 27 IP parts summary Common IP20 IP31 IP42 IP54
1 Plain Door l
2 Door (Behind) l
3 Door (Cutout) - l l - -
4
Feeders Door Gasket (17260203) - l l l l
D & Mw (below)
5 Front Plates - l - - -
6 Front Plates+Doors l
7 Wicket Door l
8 Roof (Standard) l
9 Roof (Ventilated) - l l l -
10 Roof IP31 - - l - -
11 Roof Fasteners - - l l l
12 IP Plastic Washer - - l l
13 Roof Gasket (ref. 17418240) - - l
14 Roof Gasket (ref. 17260203) - - - l l
15 Ventilation Grills l
16 Lifting Lugs l
17 IP Plates - - l l l
18 Side Panels l - - - -
19 Rear Panels or Door l - - - -
20 Door Handle l
21 Bottom Plates l
22 Door Hinge l
23 Angle Plates l
24 Paneling Gasket (ref. 17260203) - - l l l
25 Drawer Door Gasket (ref. 17260203) - - l l
26 Drawer Door Gasket (ref. 88670 and 88671) - l l - -
27 Locks l - - - -
28 Door Separator - l l - -
See chapters dealing with device equipment for further details on specific IP54 front faces.
On keylocks side only Mw2 only
BLK080031E 10-11
Enclosures Panelling
IP summary
Overview
IP20 complements IP31 complements
13
8 11
10
28 28
3 3
2
4
4
26
17
4
4
24
IP42 complements IP54 complements
14
4 14 8
24
11
24
9
4
24
24
25
4
17
17 18
24
10-12 BLK080031E
Busbars
General presentation 11-2

Busbar types 11-4
Architecture and Principle 11-7

D cubicle 11-7
Roof Types 11-8
Main busbar 11-9

In y 4000 A 11-9
4000 A < In y 7300 A 11-13
Linergy In y 1250 A 11-16
Distance between supports 11-17
Distribution busbar 11-18

Position of vertical busbars 11-18
In y 3200 A 11-19
linergy In y 1250 A 11-20
Distance between supports 11-21
Protection bars 11-22
BLK090001E 11-1
Busbars General presentation
Overview
Main busbar Placed horizontally in a partitioned compartment at the top or

bottom of the switchboard, it consists of copper bars with various
cross-section, whose number varies according to rated current,
PD401002
ambient temperature and degree of protection of the enclosure.

The connections to the distribution busbars and fishplates are
made without drilling, thus simplifying site extensions.
Note : Beyond 4000 A, the busbar is a double deck arrangement for SF
configuration.
Distribution busbar
Installed in a partitioned compartment to the side of the switchgear zone, it consists of 5 mm thick bars whose
cross-section and number depend on the current to be distributed
in the cubicle.
Circuit breaker connections for 800A and above are directly connected to
Distribution busbar.
Functional units up to 630 A are connected to the busbars either by cables or solid
bars.
Protection Conductor
The protective conductor ensures equipotential bonding of frames.
It is made up in each cubicle of a horizontal conductor connecting column frames
to one another and of a vertical conductor accomodating the power cables
PD405065
protective conductors and the earthing connections when devices so require.

Cross-section :
b 1b 50 x 5 Cu Icw 50 kA
b 2b 50 x 5 Cu Icw 85/100 kA
11-2 BLK090001E
Overview
Mw2 cubicles
Distribution busbar
Installed in a partitioned compartment at the rear of the drawers
area, it consists of 8 mm thick bars whose cross-section depends
upon the current to be distributed in the cubicle.
Functional units up to 630 A are connected to the busbar by plug blocks.
Specific shutter arrangements for tap-off outlets make the busbar inaccessible,
except for the plugs of the drawer.
The 2 busbars are linked together at the bottom with the vertical busbars link
system.
These links are encapsulated in a metal sheet box with plastic covers.
The busbar can be single when:

b all the drawers in the cubicle are of full width.
b the system fault level is y 65 kA.
Auxiliary busducts
Auxiliary busducts ensure distribution of auxiliary supplies
PD405066
and reference voltages of monitoring circuits, as well as some

communication buses.
They are installed in the connection compartments throughout the useful height of
the cubicle.
BLK090002E 11-3
Busbar types
Overview
Horizontal busbar (HBB) = main busbar

Copper busbars - D, Dc, Mf and Ms cubicles
Single HBB at the top/bottom

b rating up to 4600 A
b multi device mounting
Double HBB at the top/bottom

b not applicable for Dc columns
Double front HBB at the top/bottom

b rating up to 7250 A, only for incomer with MTZ2,MTZ3
/ NW08 - 63
Page 1-57
Linergy busbars - D, Dc, Mf and Ms cubicles
HBB at the top

11-4 BLK090003E
Busbar types
Overview
Vertical busbar (VBB) = distribution busbar

Copper busbars - D, Dc, Mf and Ms cubicles
VBB at the left / right

b rating up to 3250 A / 85/100 kA
b up to form 4
Linergy busbars - D and Mf cubicles
VBB at the left

Note: Linergy busbars cannot be used in Dc and Ms columns.
BLK090003E 11-5
Busbar types
Overview
Horizontal busbar (HBB) = main busbar

Copper busars -Mw2 cubicles
Single HBB at the top

b side and rear connection
Single HBB at the bottom

b side connection
Double HBB at the top / bottom

b side connection
Double front HBB at the top/bottom

b Side/Rear connection
Vertical busbar - Distribution busbar
Single VBB at the rear

b rating up to 1150 A.
b maximum Icw 65 kA
Double VBB at the rear

b maximum Icw 85/100 kA
11-6 BLK090004E
Busbars Architecture and principle
D cubicle
Overview
Horizontal - Vertical busbar association principle
Busbar supports Horizontal busbars b The copper busbars are pre-drilled and can be assembled at the customer's iste.
b Busbar Supports are used to provide supports to the busbars.
b Coupling with another cubicle can be done at the customer's site.
Vertical
busbars
Copper Bars
Vertical Fishplates
Horizontal busbars
Horizontal Fishplates
b Connections to the distribution busbars and fishplating are made without drilling.
Vertical
busbars b Fishplates ensures the link between the busbars. They are of 2 types:
v horizontal fishplates
v vertical fishplates
The profile of linergy busbars, makes it easier to connect the fishplates without the
need for drilling.
Linergy Bars
Horizontal fishplates Vertical fishplates
BLK090005E 11-7
Mw2 cubicle
Overview
Horizontal - Vertical busbar association principle

Horizontal busbar
Connections to the distribution busbars and fishplating are made without drilling.
Horizontal busbar / vertical
busbar link Sliding fishplates ensures the link between 2 horizontal busbars.
Angle brackets secure the connection between the horizontal and the vertical
busbar.
The used to secure the connection go through the gap between the horizontal bars.
Vertical
busbar
Copper Bars
Horizontal busbar
Horizontal busbar / vertical

busbar link
Vertical
busbar
Linergy Bars
11-8 BLK090006E
Mw2 cubicle
Overview
Double horizontal busbar principle

In case of double horizontal busbar, Mw2 cubicle ensures the equipotentiality
between both busbars.
Horizontal
busbar Specific links have been provided to connect the same phases together without
modularity loss.
Link between
the horizontal
busbars
Vertical busbar principle

Copper bars The vertical busbar is made of 20, 30, 40, 50 or 60 x 8 cross section copper bars.
b The bars are held between the tap-off unit and the rear support:
Hanging system v rear supports and tap-off units are identical across all cross sections.
The distance between the front of tap-off unit and the framework is fixed.
b A specific pin is used to adapt this dimension regarding the busbar
cross-section:
v 20 x 8
v 30 x 8
v 40 x 8
v 50 x 8
v 60 x 8
Rear support Note: The crosssection of 60 x 8 is available for single vertical busbar only.
Tap-off unit
front support
Casing
BLK090006E 10-9
Busbars Roof Types
Overview
Standard and Ventilated roofs

b Ventilated roof available only for horizontal busbar top position IP20, IP31, IP42
and NW40-4000A.
b Standard roof available for IP20, IP31, IP42 and 54.
The number and the cross-section of the bars to be used per phase is calculated
according to:
b the current
b the outside ambient temperature and
b the degree of protection in the switchboard.
standard roof solution ventilted roof solution
11-10 BLK090010E
Busbars Main busbar
In y 4000 A
b The horizontal busbar can be mounted either at the top/bottom of the cubicle.
b Splice bar connection holes are provided for any future extensions.
b A wide range of coating exists for busbars.
b The right end of the horizontal busbar is positioned 45 mm from the
outside edge of the column frame, with the left end lined up with the edge of the
frame.
b For operation in a corrosive environment, horizontal busbars must be tin-plated.
Busbar selection
The bars are secured by insulating supports, attached to the framework.
The tables below indicate:
b the rated current (In) and the number of bars per phase according to:
v the protection index (IP)
v the ambient temperature
m
00 m
00/6
10 4
00
/1 mm
20 600
0
m
m
Values given for bare copper, epoxy, silver and tin plated:
a) Standard architecture
STANDARD ROOF (D, Dc, Mf, Ms and Mw2)
IP20, IP31 & IP 42 (2) IP42 & IP54 (Without Fan)
No. of bars / phase Outside ambient temperature
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
1b x 60 x 5 850 800 750 700 750 700 650 600
2b x 60 x 5 1500 1450 1400 1300 1250 1200 1150 1100
1b x 80 x 5 1100 1050 1000 950 950 900 850 800
1b x 100 x 5 1200 1150 1100 1050 1100 1050 1000 950
1b x 125 x 5 1500 1450 1400 1300 1350 1300 1250 1200
2b x 80 x 5 1800 1750 1650 1550 1600 1550 1500 1350
2b x 100 x 5 2150 2050 1900 1850 1900 1800 1750 1650
2b x 125 x 5 2550 2450 2350 2200 2300 2200 2100 2000
3b x 100 x 5 2750 2650 2550 2400 2500 2400 2300 2150
3b x 125 x 5 3250 3100 3000 2800 2850 2700 2600 2450
4b x 100 x 5 3300 3150 3000 2850 3000 2900 2750 2600
4b x 125 x 5 3800 3650 3500 3300 3500 3350 3200 3000
5b x 100 x 5 (1) 3600 3450 3300 3150 3300 3150 3000 2800
5b x 125 x 5 4100 3900 3800 3550 3800 3650 3450 3300
(1) This solution is not optimized, it is recommended to use 4 x 125 x 5.

(2) IP20 & IP31 solution is Without Fan & IP 42 solution is with Fan
BLK090020E 11-11
Busbars Main busbar
In y 4000 A
VENTILATED ROOF (D, Dc, Mf, Ms and Mw2)

IP20, IP31 & IP 42 (2) IP42 (Without Fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
1b x 60 x 5 950 900 850 800 800 750 700 650
1b x 80 x5 1250 1150 1100 1050 1000 950 900 850
1b x 100 x 5 1350 1300 1200 1100 1150 1100 1050 950
1b x 125 x 5 1700 1600 1500 1400 1400 1350 1300 1250
2b x 60 x 5 1650 1600 1500 1400 1350 1300 1200 1150
2b x 80 x 5 2000 1900 1800 1700 1700 1650 1550 1400
2b x 100 x 5 2400 2250 2150 2000 2000 1900 1850 1700
2b x 125 x 5 2850 2650 2550 2350 2400 2300 2200 2100
3b x 100 x 5 3050 2900 2750 2600 2600 2500 2350 2200
3b x 125 x 5 3600 3450 3250 3050 2950 2800 2700 2500
4b x 100 x 5 3650 3500 3300 3100 3100 2950 2800 2650
4b x 125 x 5 4250 4000 3800 3550 3600 3450 3300 3100
5b x 100 x 5 (1) 3900 3700 3600 3300 3400 3250 3050 2850
5b x 125 x 5 4600 4350 4100 3850 3900 3750 3550 3350
5b x 125 x 5 (3) - - - - 4000 4000 3800 3600
(1) This solution is not optimized, it is recommended to use 4 x 125 x 5

(2) IP20 & IP31 solution is Without Fan & IP 42 solution is with Fan.
(3) This solution is only for system with MTZ2 40 / NW40 4000A incomer.
b) Double front architecture

IP20, IP31 & IP 42 (1) IP42 & IP54 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
(2b+2b) x 60 x 5 2500 2400 2300 2200 2300 2200 2100 2000

(2b+2b) x 80 x 5 3200 3050 2900 2700 2950 2850 2700 2500
(2b+2b) x 100 x 5 3700 3550 3350 3100 3500 3350 3150 2900

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
(2b+2b) x 60 x 5 2650 2550 2450 2300 2400 2300 2200 2100
(2b+2b) x 80 x 5 3450 3350 3150 2900 3100 2950 2800 2600
(2b+2b) x 100 x 5 4000 3850 3600 3300 3600 3450 3250 3000
(1) IP20 & IP31 solution is Without Fan & IP 42 solution is with Fan.
Page 1-57
11-12 BLK090020E
Busbars Main busbar
4000 A < In y 7300 A
b The 7300 A horizontal busbar is made up by 2 standard busbars installed one

above the other.
b Splice bar connection holes are provided for any future extensions.
b A wide range of coating exists for busbars.
b The right end of the horizontal busbar is positioned 45 mm from the
outside edge of the column frame, with the left end is lined up with the edge of the
frame.
b For operation in a corrosive environment, horizontal busbars must be tin-plated.
Busbar selection
00 m
m v the protection index (IP)
00/6 v the ambient temperature
10 4
00
/1 mm
20 600
0
m
m
Values given for bare copper, epoxy, silver and tin plated:
a) Standard architecture
STANDARD ROOF (D, Dc, Mf, Ms and Mw2 cubicles)

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 & IP54 (Without Fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
2 x 3b x 100 x 5 5100 4900 4700 4550 4400 4250 4100 3900
2 x 4b x 100 x 5 6000 5800 5550 5250 5200 5000 4800 4500
2 x 5b x 100 x 5 6600 6350 6100 5800 5800 5600 5300 5100
VENTILATED ROOF (D, Dc, Mf, Ms and Mw2 cubicles)

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 (Without Fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
2 x 3b x 100 x 5 5650 5400 5100 4800 4600 4400 4250 4050
2 x 4b x 100 x 5 6600 6350 6000 5650 5400 5150 4950 4650
2 x 5b x 100 x 5 7000 7000 6600 6200 6000 5750 5450 5250
BLK090022E 11-15
Busbars Main busbar
4000 A < In y 7300 A
b) Double front architecture

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 & 54 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
(3b+3b) x 100 x 5 5300 5100 4850 4600 4600 4400 4200 4000
(4b+4b) x 100 x 5 6150 5950 5650 5350 5350 5200 5000 4700
(5b+5b) x 100 x 5 6750 6500 6200 5900 6000 5800 5500 5200

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
(3b+3b) x 100 x 5 5850 5550 5250 4950 4700 4600 4400 4150
(4b+4b) x 100 x 5 6700 6450 6100 5750 5600 5350 5050 4750
(5b+5b) x 100 x 5 7250 7000 6700 6300 6250 6050 5750 5400
Page 1-57
11-16 BLK090022E
Busbars
Notes
BLK090022E 11-17
Busbars Main busbar
Linergy In y 1250 A
b The horizontal linergy busbar is available up to 1250 A.

b Linergy busbars are not applicable to Dc and Ms columns.
b The linergy busbars have a constant cross-section and require no drilling.
b The right end of the horizontal busbar is positioned 10 mm from
the outside edge of the column frame, while the left end is lined up with the edge of
the frame.
Busbar selection
v Protection index (IP)
v Ambient temperature
m
00 m
00/6
10 4
00
/1 mm
20 600
0
m
m
Values given for linergy busbars:

c) Standard architecture
STANDARD ROOF (D, Mf and Mw2 cubicles)
IP ≤ 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Linergy 630 A 630 630 630 630
Linergy 800 A 800 800 800 800
Linergy 1000 A 1000 1000 1000 1000
Linergy 1250 A 1250 1250 1250 1200
.
VENTILATED ROOF (D, Mf and Mw2 cubicles)

IP ≤ 42
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Linergy 630 A 630 630 630 630
Linergy 800 A 800 800 800 800
Linergy 1000 A 1000 1000 1000 1000
Linergy 1250 A 1250 1250 1250 1200
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on item 6.6 of Assembly guide in ESMS
version 2015
Note: Linergy busbars are applicable only upto 1250 A.
11-18 BLK090024E
Busbars Main busbars
Distance between supports
D, Dc, Mf and Ms cubicles
Basic principles
The bar supports the mechanical resistance of the main circuit, and in particular
when a short-circuit occurs. The maximum distance between the supports depends
on:
b the rated short-time withstand current
b the number and cross-section of the bars
b their centre distances (125 mm).
Application rule
The distance between supports should be at its maximum, and equal to the value
quoted in the different tables.
b The maximum distance values are given in mm. The tables were developed
from conformity certificates to type tests. The tables should be used with 50 or
60 Hz three-phase AC current.
Table for 125 mm bar centre distance (depth 600 mm)

Busbar cross-section / ph Icw=50 kA Icw=85 kA Icw=100 kA (1)
1b x 60 x 5 475 forbidden forbidden
2b x 60 x 5 475 237.50 forbidden
2b x 80 x 5 475 237.50 forbidden
2b x 100 x 5 475 237.50 forbidden
2b x 125 x 5 475 237.50 forbidden
3b x 100 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
3b x 125 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
4b x 100 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
4b x 125 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
5b x 100 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
5b x 125 x 5 475 237.50 237.50
Note: (1) For 100 kA use thermoset insulator LVMN0801 instead of 705658.
(2) For 100kA, refer to drawings NVE94311, NVE94382 and NVE88015.
Table for 125 mm bar centre distance (depth 600 mm)

Busbar cross-section/ph Icw=50 kA Icw=85 kA
Type of supports fixed fixed + movable
Linergy 630 A 475 forbidden
Note: Linergy busbars are applicable only upto 50 kA.
Table for double busbars (depth 600 mm)

Busbar cross-section / ph Icw=100 kA
1 x 3b x 100 x 5 237.5
1 x 3b x 100 x 5 237.5
1 x 4b x 100 x 5 237.5
1 x 4b x 100 x 5 237.5
1 x 5b x 100 x 5 237.5
1 x 5b x 100 x 5 237.5
Note: In case of breakers MTZ3 40/NW40b, MTZ3 50/NW50, and
MTZ3 63/NW63 connected to double horizontal busbar, the Icc is equal to 100 kA
for the connections.
BLK090024E 11-19
Busbars Distribution busbar
Mw2 cubicle
Basic principles
The bar supports ensure the mechanical resistance of the main circuit, and
particularly when a short-circuit occurs. The maximum distance between the
supports depends on the rated short-time withstand current, on the number and
cross-section of the bars, as well as their centre distances (125 mm).
Application rule
The distance between supports should, at its maximum, be equal to the value
b The maximum distance values are given in mm. The tables were developed
from conformity certificates to type testes. The tables are to be used with 50 or 60
Hz three-phase AC current.
Flat copper busbars

Table for single busbars
DD401056
Top view
Busbar cross-section / ph Icw=50 kA Icw=85 kA Icw=100 kA (1)
2b x 60 x 5 400 200 forbidden
125 mm

2b x 100 x 5 400 200 200
2b x 125 x 5 400 200 200
3b x 100 x 5 400 200 200
3b x 125 x 5 400 200 200
4b x 100 x 5 400 200 200
4b x 125 x 5 400 200 200
5b x 100 x 5 400 200 200
5b x 125 x 5 400 200 200
Type of supports fixed fixed + movable fixed + movable
(1) For 100 kA, use thermoset insulator LVMN0801 instead of 705658.
Table for double busbars

Busbar cross-section/ph Icw=85/100 kA
2 x 3b x 100 x 5 200
200
2 x 4b x 100 x 5 200
200
2 x 5b x 100 x 5 200
200
Type of supports fixed + movable
Linergy busbars:
Top view
Table for single busbars
Busbar cross-section / ph Icw=50 kA
Linergy 630/800 A 400

125 mm
Linergy 1000 A 400
Linergy 1250 A 400
11-20 BLK090024E
Position of vertical busbars
D, Mf and Ms cubicles
b The vertical busbar supports are mounted in the interior of the column frame in
Flat / Linergy an extension framework.
Vertical Busbars
BLK090024E 11-21
In y 3200 A
b The 3200 A vertical busbar can be installed in a dedicated side column

of 200 mm width, either to the left or right of the Functional Unit cubicle.
b A wide range of coatings exists for busbars.
b The vertical busbar supports are mounted in the interior of the column frame in
an extension framework.
b For operation in a corrosive atmosphere, vertical busbars must be tin-plated
Busbar selection
v Protection index (IP)
v Ambient temperature
m
00 m
00/6
10 4
00
/1 mm
20 600
0
m
m
Values given for bare copper, epoxy, silver and tin plated
Type D, Mf, and Ms
STANDARD ROOF (D, Mf and Ms cubicles)

IP20, IP31 & IP42 (1) IP42 & 54 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
1b x 60 x 5 850 800 750 700 750 700 650 600
2b x 60 x 5 1500 1450 1400 1300 1250 1200 1150 1100
1b x 80 x 5 1100 1050 1000 950 950 900 850 800
2b x 80 x 5 1800 1750 1650 1550 1600 1550 1500 1350
3b x 80 x 5 2350 2250 2150 2050 2150 2050 1950 1850
4b x 80 x 5 2800 2700 2550 2400 2550 2450 2350 2200
5b x 80 x 5 3250 3100 3000 2800 2950 2850 2700 2550
Note: For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on item 6.6 of Assembly guide in TTF.
11-22 BLK090024E
Busbars Derating Table for Fishbone
Distribution Busbar
Values given for bare copper, epoxy, silver and tin plated
STANDARD ROOF (D cubicle)

IP20, IP31 & IP42 IP42 & 54 (Without fan)
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
1b x 60 x 5 800 750 700 650 700 650 600 550
2b x 60 x 5 1400 1350 1300 1200 1150 1100 1050 1000
3b x 60 x 5 1650 1575 1500 1425 1500 1425 1350 1275
4b x 60 x 5 2000 1925 1800 1700 1825 1750 1650 1550
5b x 60 x 5 2250 2200 2150 2075 2125 2050 1925 1825
BLK090024E 11-23
linergy In y 1250 A
b The linergy busbar is available up to 1250 A.

b Linergy busbars are not applicable to Dc and Ms columns.
b Linergy busbars have a constant cross section and require no drilling.
Busbar selection
m
00 m
00/6
10 4
00
/1 mm
20 600
0
m
m
Values given for linergy busbars:

c) Standard architecture
STANDARD ROOF (D and Mf cubicles)
IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Linergy 630 680 630 590 550 590 550 530 520
Linergy 800 840 800 760 720 760 720 680 650
Linergy 1000 1040 990 950 900 950 900 850 810
Linergy 1250 1290 1230 1170 1100 1170 1100 1050 1000
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on item 6.6 of Assembly guide in TTF.
IP42 is a solution with fan. For more details, refer to drawing 51130469X0.
VENTILATED ROOF (D and Mf cubicles)

IP ≤ 42 IP 54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
Linergy 630 680 630 590 550 590 550 530 520
Linergy 800 840 800 760 720 760 720 680 650
Linergy 1000 1040 990 950 900 950 900 850 810
Linergy 1250 1290 1230 1170 1100 1170 1100 1050 1000
For carrying out the IP, verify the rules on item 6.6 of Assembly guide in TTF.
IP42 is a solution with fan. For more details, refer to drawing 51130469X0.
11-24 BLK090024E
D, Mf and Ms cubicles
Basic principles
The bar supports ensure the mechanical resistance of the main circuit, and
in particular when a short-circuit occurs. The maximum distance between the
supports depends on:
b the rated short-time withstand current
b the number and cross-section of the bars
Application rule
The distance between supports should, at its maximum, be equal to the value
Note: Bottom wedge supports do not contribute to the electrodynamic force

resistance. The maximum distance values are given in mm. The tables were
developed from conformity certificates to type test. The tables are to be used with
50 or 60 Hz three-phase AC current.
Table for 125 mm bar centre distances (depth 600), for side
vertical busbar
Busbar cross-section/ph Icw=50 kA Icw=85 kA Icw=100 kA (1)
4b x 80 x 5 500 250 250
5b x 80 x 5 500 250 250
Type of supports fixed fixed + movable fixed + movable
Linergy 630 A 500 forbidden forbidden
b Refer to drawing 51127307.
(1) For 100kA use Thermoset Insulator LVMN0801 instead of 705658
Table for 125 mm bar centre distances (depth 600), for vertical
busbar of Fishbone
Busbar cross-section Icw=50 Ka/1s Icw=85 Ka/1s
1 x 60 x 5 500 forbidden
2 x 60 x 5 500 250
3 x 60 x 5 500 250
4 x 60 x 5 500 250
5 x 60 x 5 500 250
Diversity Factor Vertical busbars: the bar cross-sections for vertical busbars are determined
according to the In (nominal current) which is to be distributed. In order to find the
maximum In (nominal current) of a vertical busbar, apply the following general rule.
b Add up the derated In (nominal current) of all circuit breakers linked to the same
vertical busbar, multiply by the diversity factor (IEC 61439-1/2 recommendation)
below:
Number of circuit breakers on vertical Diversity factor

busbar
2 and 3 0.9
4 and 5 0.8
6 and 9 0.7
10 and more 0.6
With the In (nominal current) thus obtained, refer to the tables with the admissible
currents in the bars to find the cross-section.
BLK090024E 11-25
Notes
Busbars
11-26 BLK090024E
Busbars Mw2 Distribution busbar
Overview
Double vertical busbar

The Mw2 vertical busbar is double.
It endows its unquestionable advantages:

b regarding the short circuit current (Icw).
The short-circuit current flows in to 2 busbars. So it is almost double in
comparison with a single busbar.
b regarding the nominal current (In).
As the short-circuit current, the drawers nominal current flows in 2 busbars.
So each bar cross-section is smaller than for a single busbar making its
installation smaller and giving more place to the drawers.
b regarding the switchboard stacking density.
Having no specific adaptation for half width

drawers, the double busbar gives more place
inside the drawer for the devices installation, thus
favours their ventilation.
Half drawers in Mw2 cubicle

Fixed parts No repartitor
but by compact
connectors
DD405688
Moving parts
BLK090025E 11-27
Overview
The vertical busbar is simple to assemble:

the copper bars 1 are encapsulated in a metal sheet compartment 2 . They are
held between the rear supports 3 and the tap-off units 4 used for drawer
connections. Each unit can be easily installed in the framework by using the hanging
system 5 . The 2 units are linked with copper bars 6 shielded in a Form 2 box
allowing the natural ventilation.
11-28 BLK090025E
Overview
Mw2 Vertical busbar assembly
b The Mw2 distribution busbar is double.

b It is available for 2200 mm high cubicle.
b This busbar is made up of two separate units linked together with a vertical busbar
link system.
b When the cubicle hosts only full width drawers, it is possible to use only one unit.
b With the double V-BB, the Icw is doubled.
b Each unit, 3 or 4 poles, is equipped with specific connection system adapted to
Mw2 drawers.
b Mounting in the Mw2 cubicle is made easier, thanks to the fastening system
innovation.
Busbar selection
The bars and its insulated supports are encapsulated by a metal sheet shield.
The shield is attached to the framework.
b the permissible short-time current (Icw) and the number of bars per phase,
according to:
v the rated current
Double Busbar Single Busbar b the number of busbar supports according to the type and dimensions of the
cubicle.
Double busbar rated current In (A) No. of bars / phase Icw max (kA)
Natural ventilation
IP 20/31/42 IP54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
800 720 640 600 660 600 550 500 2 x 20 x 8 65
1250 1140 1050 950 1100 1000 900 800 2 x 30 x 8 75
1600 1450 1350 1250 1400 1280 1160 1040 2 x 40 x 8 80
2000 1800 1700 1600 1720 1580 1440 1300 2 x 50 x 8 85/100(1)
Double busbar fits with half width and full width drawers.
Note: (1)100kA only in case of Top Horizontal Busbar.
Single busbar rated current In (A) No. of bars / phase Icw max (kA)
Natural ventilation
IP 20/31/42 IP54
35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C
400 360 330 300 330 300 270 250 1 x 20 x 8 33
630 580 530 480 560 510 450 400 1 x 30 x 8 50
800 730 670 610 710 650 580 510 1 x 40 x 8 60
1000 920 850 800 860 800 730 650 1 x 50 x 8 65
1150 1060 970 880 1000 920 840 750 1 x 60 x 8 65
Single busbar fits with only full width drawers.
WARNING
Use of Tin for Withdrawable contacts (Mw2 Distribution Busbar and Mw2
Fixed part customer connection Bar) is prohibited to avoid fretting
corrosion.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury.
BLK090025E 11-29
Notes
Busbars
Overview
11-30 BLK090025E
Busbars Protection bars
Overview
D, Dc, Mf, Mw2 and Ms neutral vertical bars

Cross-section of the bars according to Icw of main busbar
Icw PE cross-section
30 / 50 kA 1b x 50 x 5
85 / 100 kA 2b x 50 x 5
Mw2 protection bars

Bars cross-section according to Icw of main busbar
DD401029
DD401030
Icw PE cross-section
50 kA 1 x 50 x 5
85/100 kA 2 x 50 x 5
Rear connection cubicle Side connection cubicle

DD401029
BLK090026E 11-31
Notes
BlokSeT
specific adaptations
BlokSeT Seismic 12-2

Introduction 12-2
BlokSeT corrosive atmosphere 12-4

Introduction 12-4
Busbars coatings 12-5
Common parts 12-7
BlokSeT forced ventilation 12-9

Introduction 12-9
BlokSeT internal arc 12-11

Introduction 12-11
Vamp system: arc flash protection 12-12
Wireless Thermal monitoring system 12-18
Thermal monitoring system 12-20
Gulf Adaptation - In addition to the standard offer12-18
BLK110000E 12-1
BlokSeT BlokSeT Seismic
specific adaptations Introduction
Overview
Seismic zones around the world
DD405162
zone 4
zone 3
zone 2
zone 1
zone 0
Schneider Electric solutions

BlokSeT has run successful tests ensuring its compliance with the
following spectrums:
Standard Ground Spectrum Seismic

acceleartion Equivalence zone
with Ritcher
Scale
IBC 2006 and amendment Site class A,
Floor level only -
ICBO AC 156 B,C and D
1
BlokSeT AG2 Floor & roof levels < 5.5
2
2G UBC 97 and amendment
ICBO AC 156 AG3 Floor & roof levels 5.5 to 7.0 3
AG5 Floor level only 7.0 to 9.0 4
Spectrum Equivalence with Richter scale, according to IEC 68-3-3.
Important:
b The above withstand can only be ensured by strictly following the Adaptation
Rules given in BlokSeT transfer file (refer Drgs: 51127007X0 & NHA2248902).
b If your customer provides you with specific values other than richter (PGA,
etc.) or documents regarding the required seismic withstand (with spectra or
calculation), they have to be informed about the UBC spectra shown above, by
referring to this document.
12-2 BLK110000E
BlokSeT BlokSeT Seismic
Overview
Required Response Spectrum Validated in Blokset

10
Blokset - Horizontal
Acceleration in g
1 Blokset - Vertical
Blokset Test Conditions :

0.1
Time History Duration : 20 seconds
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Frequency (Hz)
BLK110000E 12-3
BlokSeT BlokSeT corrosive atmosphere
Overview
Pollution SO2 = Sulphur dioxide

H2S = Hydrogen sulphur
These atmospheric sulphuric polluting agents are mainly found in heavy industries:
oil, metal, paper, mills, etc. Associated with humidity, they become extremely
corrosive.
Bare copper and silver-plated copper, commonly used in our

applications, are particularly sensitive to the sulphuric
polluting agents.
The different effects encountered on site are:
b corrosion of silver-plated withdrawable connections, leading to a high contact
resistance, even to a non-contact (jaws whatever their rating).
b corrosion of the silver-plated bars, and appearance of silver wires (whiskers
effect).
b corrosion of bare copper leading to crumbling.
b corrosion of the live switchgear parts (auxiliaries, circuit-breakers, contactors,
etc.) leading to non-operation on fault, operation and so on.
b corrosion of cables with bare areas (power or auxiliaries) leading to bursts, high
resistance, etc.
It is then necessary to protect by other types of coating.
Choice of BlokSeT standard / BlokSeT corrosive

atmosphere
The choice of BlokSeT standard / BlokSeT anti-corrosive configuration depends on:
b the type of pollutant (sulphur dioxyde / hydrogen sulphide).
b the concentration of pollutant elements given by the standard IEC 721-3-3.
b the management of the air regarding the pollution (cleaned air for no
pollution management).
For more details for blokset corrosive ambience rules, refer document "5.3 BlokSeT
in corrosive ambiance"
Categories
Conditions of use on a fixed workstation 3C1R 3C1L 3C1 3C2
(as per standard IEC 60721-3-3)
Concentration maximum value maximum value maximum value average value Maximum value
> Sulphur dioxyde (mg / m3) 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.3 1
> Hydrogen sulphide (mg / m ) 3
0.0015 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.5
Places where atmosphere is striclty monitored and regulated
(«clean room» category) BlokSeT BlokSeT
Standard anticorrosive
Places where atmosphere is permanently monitored
Places located in rural and urban areas where industrial

activities are few and where traffic is moderate mandatory
Places located in urban areas with industrial activities or BlokSeT anti-corrosive
considerable traffic recommended
12-4 BLK110000E
specific adaptations Busbars coatings
Overview
Nickel-plating the busbars
Coating designation
Standard ISO 1456
Designation Cu / Ni10
Minimal coating thickness
for corrosive atmospheres SI units µm

Value 10 (Max: 25)
Type of coating
Nickel electroplating on copper
WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
Chemical nickel plating is strictly prohibited (electrical & thermal resistance is
too important).
Tin-plating the busbars
Coating designation
Standard ISO 2093
Designation Cu / Sn15
Minimal coating thickness
for corrosive atmospheres SI units µm
Value 15
Type of coating
Tin electroplating on copper
WARNING
HAZARD OF FIRE
The use of tin for withdrawable contacts is prohibited to avoid fretting corrosion.
BLK110000E 12-5
specific adaptations Busbars coatings
Overview
Derating rules
Horizontal busbar, fishplates, horizontal busbar / vertical busbar links, PE
Screwed contact
Protection Cu / Sn15
Additional derating Refer derating tables
Vertical busbar
Screwed contact Sliding contact
Protection Cu / Sn15 Cu / Ni10
Additional derating Refer derating tables 20%
Power connections
Screwed contact Sliding contact
Protection Cu / Sn15 Cu / Ni10
Additional derating No 20%
The functional units

EcoStruxure Power Build chooses the correct derating and adapted specific parts.
12-6 BLK110000E
specific adaptations Common parts
Overview
Steel sheet and frame

In general, the standard coating for Schneider Electric offers has a good withstand to
sulphuric corrosive atmospheres:
EZ sheet steel + Epoxy paint
Bare galvanized steel parts:
Bi-chromated parts
Screwing with standard screws and washers
(Zn5c or Zn8c or Zn8b) are OK for
this application.
Plastics parts
No special protection.
Accessories
Under IEC 60721-3-3 standard, the following precautions must be taken:
b auxiliary cabling: should be tinned copper type.

b auxiliary relays: must have tinned plated terminals and nickel or gold plated
main contacts.
Telemecanique RX series auxiliary relays, with a plugin base, can be ordered with
gold plated contacts.
b additional function relays: shall be compliant with class 3C2 as per table 4 of
IEC 60721-3-3 standard.
b terminal blocks: are usually tinned.
b termination pins: in case used, should be tin plated. Telemecanique DZ5 cable
termination pins are tin plated and recommended for this use.
Busbar joints and connection to busbars
Permanent contacts between busbars

Connections between horizontal busbars, or connections between horizontal and
vertical busbars - 15 microns tin coating (Sn 15) of the whole permanently fixed
busbars.
Note: A tin or nickel coated contact does not pose any risk of electrochemical
coupling (battery effect).
In Mw2 cubicles, the connecting links between the horizontal and vertical busbars
should be tin-plated.
Vertical busbars in Mw2 cubicles must not be tinned: huge risk of tin removal and
subsequent damage to moving contacts.
Moving contacts (withdrawable, in Mw2 cubicles)

These contacts are found in upstream, downstream and auxiliary connections of a
Mw2 drawer.
To ensure corrosive ambiance resistance of this area, as well as of the whole
vertical withdrawable (Mw) busbar - 10 microns Ni coating (Ni 10) of the whole
vertical withdrawable (Mw2) busbar and outgoing copper links.
It is also mandatory to use the corrosive ambiance drawer BlokSeT components
(power and auxiliary):
Tin coating shall never be used for withdrawable contacts.
BLK110000E 12-7
specific adaptations Common parts
Overview
Switchgear All devices and switchgears installed in BlokSeT are sensitive to corrosive
ambiance.
b Power circuits:
v Switchgear: (MasterPact and ComPacT circuit breakers, TeSys contactors)
v Electronic devices:(Altivar speed drives, Altistart soft-starters)
b Auxiliary circuits:
v Protection relays:(TeSys U and TeSys T ranges, TeSys D (thermal relays)
range, Sepam relays range, Powermeters PM5000/8000)
v Auxiliary relays
v Telemecanique Harmony push buttons
v Telemecanique limit switches
For BlokSeT to be compliant with corrosive ambiance, the switchgear and control
devices inside it must also comply with the same level of H2S / S02 pollution. Most
Plug-in device Device on chasis
of Schneider Electric components have specific versions withstanding corrosive
ambiance, either in 3C1 or 3C2 levels.
Important:
b In case any components are installed in BlokSeT complained for 3C1, then
switchboard is to be considered 3C1, not 3C2. For information about corrosive
ambiance withstand of Schneider Electric switchgears and control devices,
please contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
b MCCBs on chasis and MCCBs on base are forbidden in a corrosive
environment.
Protective conductors
Protective conductors of the cubicle shall be tin coated (Sn 15).
Power cabling
Example: Upstream and downstream connection of a MCCB feeder, variable speed

drive, soft-starter, or capacitor bank, using cables and lugs.
b all cables to be used shall be with PVC insulation.
b lugs used to equip power and control cables shall be tinned.
b a rubber sleeve shall be used to cover the non-insulated part of the cable and
the crimping area.
12-8 BLK110000E
BlokSeT BlokSeT forced ventilation
Overview
Reducing the temperature in a cubicle optimizes its nominal

current.
Forced ventilation, in the BlokSeT offer, allows an approximately
15% gain on the busbars and devices rating.
Forced ventilation in BlokSeT, is a solution with a fan. There is a requirement for

forced ventilation, for the below configurations:
b Specific configurations of MTZ2 40, MTZ3 40/50/63 and NW40/40b/50/63
b Dc and Ms cubicles
32
Fan Ventilation Grill b D and Mf for IP42

b D for IP54 (MTZ3 50/63 and NW50/63)
1. Specific configurations of MTZ2 40 / MTZ3 40 / 50 / 63, NW40/40b/50/63 with fan

There are 3 possible configurations available for the MTZ2 40, MTZ3 40/50/63 and
NW40/40b/50/63 breakers with fan.
b Config 1: Column with a width of 1200 mm and depth of 600 mm with 2 fans on
the front door.
b For a detailed drawings for configurations:

v MTZ3 40/NW40b, refer to 51131573X0 and 51131574X0.
v MTZ3 50, 63 / NW50 and NW63, refer to 51131565X0.
v MTZ2 40 / NW40 at a depth of 1000 mm, refer to 51127696x0 pg 2.
b Config 2: Column with a width of 1200 mm and depth of 1000 mm (MTZ3 50/63
/ NW50/63) and 1200 mm (MTZ3 40 / NW40b), with 2 fans and 2 ventilation grills
installed as shown.
For more details, refer drawing no. HRB4454402.
b Config 3: Column with a width of 1200 mm and depth of 1200 mm (MTZ3 50/63
/ NW50/63), with 2 fans and 2 ventilation grills installed as shown.
For more details, refer drawing no. NHA28749(MTZ3 63 NW63) and

GEX23027(MTZ3 50, NW50)
600 1200
Two ventilation grills

in front position
ref. NSYCAG291LPF
Two fans in rear position

ref. NSYCVF850M230PF
See drawings:
HRB44544 (single front)
GEX23027 (double front
MTZ3 50, NW50 )
NHA28749 (double front
MTZ3 40b/63 NW40b/63)
1200
1000/1200 1200 Two ventilation grills 1000/1200
MTZ3 50/63 in front position MTZ3 40
NW50 / NW63 ref. NSYCAG291LPF NW40b
BLK110000E 12-9
BlokSeT BlokSeT forced ventilation
Overview
2. Dedicated Dc and Ms cubicles

Due to extensive heat build up in the capacitor and variable speed drive and soft
starter cubicles, it is mandatory to provide fans and grills.
3. D and Mf cubicles for IP42

There is a requirement under IP42, that 1 fan should be installed for every third
column.
For more details refer drawing 51130469.
Change in IP with fan choice:

With a wide variety of choice of fans and respective accessories, there is a change in
the IP.
b To change from IP54 to IP31, remove parts A, B and add part C.
b To change from IP54 to IP20, remove the filter B.
For more details, refer drawing 51132529.
Remove the washer in order

IP-54/42 to instal the grill IP31 Ref. 51132433 IP-31 IP-20
1x
51132433
Ref. NSYCVF165M
1
A C
B
FILTER
12-10 BLK110000E
BlokSeT BlokSeT internal arc
Overview
What is internal arc?

Internal arc is composed of three main steps.
1- Air ionization making it conductive
PD405102
2- Explosion, creating a shock wave that can be lethal (= 4 kg of TNT)

3- Projections of molten metal particles (easily reaching a temperature of 3000°C).
How does an internal arc occur ?

Internal arc occurs mainly when the insulation between two live parts does not any
more fulfill the technical requirements (reduced distance, reduced dielectric
strength).
The main origins of this reduced insulation are usually:
b faulty insulation or conductors overheating (insufficient section),
b bad protection by the circuit breaker,
b bad tightening of electrical connections,
b wear of the power sliding contacts,
b oxidation of connections between conductors,
b intrusion of animals in the switchboard (rat, snake, etc.),
b forgotten tools (used during maintenance or installation),
b presence of excessive moisture and / or dust in the switchboard and so on.
Standards for manufacturers,

to limit internal arc effects b IEC61641 V3
The switchboard must fulfill the following acceptance criteria to be internal arc
certified:
b Doors and covers remain correctly secured

b No switchbaord parts fly off
b Arcing does not create holes in a freely accessible external part
b Indicators arrranged vertically do not ignite
b Equipment bonding still effective after test
b Arc confined into the ignited area and no propagation of it into other area
b After fault clearing or affected functional unit isolation, emergency operation of
remaining assembly is still possible.
BLK110000E 12-11
BlokSeT Vamp system: arc flash protection
Overview
Using classes
Classification with regards to protection characteristics:
b Arcing Class A
v Assembly providing personnel protection under arcing condition by arc tested
zones, criteria 1 to 5.
b Arcing Class B
v Assembly providing personnel and assembly protection under arcing
conditions by arc tested zones, criteria 1 to 6.
b Arcing Class C
v Assembly providing personnel and assembly protection under arcing
conditions by arc tested zones, criteria 1 to 7.
b Arcing Class I
v Assembly providing a reduced risk of arcing fault solely by means of arc
ignition protected zones.
Vamp 321
Classification with regard to person who have access:
- Restricted (by default): authorized persons only have access to the assembly.
- Unrestricted: assembly can be placed in a location accessible to everyone
including ordinary persons.
BlokSeT performance
BlokSeT internal arc performance is tested at 100kA/0.4s which complies with IEC/
TR 61641- V3.
BlokSeT is classified under Class C with restricted access.
For more details, refer to the internal arc test certificates in the "Certificate books”.
Assembling internal arc column

Vam 4C
In order to withstand the over pressure initiated by the 100 kA arc fault, the
enclosure should be reinforced in order to satisfy the seven criteria defined by IEC/
TR 61641- V3. The differences between the standard offer and the Internal Arc one
is mainly on the following points:
• Modification/reinforcement of doors hinged
• Reinforcement of locks
• Fixing reinforcement of covers and rear doors
For more detailed information, refer assembly drawing 51132833X0.
This drawing is composed of several pages where all the required reinforcement
details are explained. In order to provide an equipment complying with the type test
certificate, all these details must be followed.
Vam 10L
12-12 BLK110000E
Overview
The Vamp system is optional

The arc protection units detects an arc flash in an installation and trips the feeding
breaker.
Arc flash protection maximises personnel protection and minimises material
damage to the installation in the most hazardous power system fault situation.
Advantages
Personnel protection
A fast and reliable arc protection unit may save human lives in the event of an
arcfault occuring in the switchgear during work in or near an installation.
Reduces production losses

The shorter operating time of the arc flash protection unit, the smaller will be the
damage caused by the arc fault and the shorter the possible power outage.
Extended switchgear life cycle

A modern arc protection unit increases the life-cycle expectancy of switchgear
installations, so that decisions to invest in new switchgear installations can be
postponed and money can be saved by re-vamping existing switchgear systems.
Reduced insurance costs

The faster and better the protection system of a power installations, the more
generous will be the terms and costs of insurance.
Low investment costs and fast installation

A comprehensive arc protection system is characterised by low investment costs
and fast installation and commissioning times.
One successful operation of the arc flash protection units provides an immediate
investment payoff.
Reliable operation
Operation is based on the appearance of light or alternatively on the appearance of
light and current from an external device.
Immune to nuisance trippings due to dual tripping criteria: light and current.
BLK110000E 12-13
Overview
System features
- Current and light tripping criteria.
- Operating time 7 ms or less.
- Accurate location of arc fault utilising point sensors.
- Four selective protection zones per central unit.
- Self-supervision of the entire system.
- Easy interconnect using VX001 cables.
- Phase current measuring.
- Circuit breaker fail protection (CBFP).
Sensors
- Arc detection from Horizontal, Vertical busbar simultaneously.
- Self-monitored.
- Cable length adjustable (from 6 m to 20 m).
Table 12-1 CT location of ACB incomer cubicle

1+6 1+6 1+6
1 + 8a
Type of Bottom Rear connection Side
600connection
mm Side 8aconnection
1 +mm
1000 Top direct
1200 mm Rear-Top1 + 8a Current
circuit horizontal 6 and 7 8a 8d600 mm connection
1000 mm Busway
1 +10 1200 mm transformer
1000 mm
breaker busbar 10 connection Qty.
600 mm 1200 mm
1 (6 or 10)+11a (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x x x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 x x x x x x 1 or 2
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 x x x x x x 1 or 2
NW 32
MTZ2 40* x x forbidden forbidden x x 1 or 2
NW 40*
MTZ2 40** x - forbidden forbidden forbidden x 1 or 2
NW 40**
MTZ3 40b - - forbidden forbidden x - 0 or 1
NW 40b
MTZ3 50-63 - - forbidden forbidden x - 0 or 1
NW 50 -63
*For NW40 option1 thermoplastic support and option10+11a can not install CT
**For NW40 4000A solution and option1 and option 6+11a thermoplastic support can not install CT
12-14 BLK110000E
Overview
Type of Top Rear connection Side connection Side

2 + 8bconnection Bottom direct Rear-Top Current
circuit horizontal 6 and 7 8b 2 + 6 8c
600 mm connection
1000 mm Busway 2 + 9 1200 transformer
2 + 5mm
breaker busbar 600 mm
2+7
1000 mm 9 connection
600
1200 mm mm Qty. 1000 mm 12
2 6 +11b (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x x x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 x x x x x x 1 or 2
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 x x x x x forbidden 1 or 2
NW 32
MTZ2 40* x x forbidden forbidden x forbidden 1 or 2
NW 40*
MTZ2 40** x - forbidden forbidden forbidden forbidden 1
NW 40**
MTZ3 40b - - forbidden forbidden x forbidden 0 or 1
NW 40b
MTZ3 50-63 - - forbidden forbidden x forbidden 0 or 1
NW 50 -63
*For NW40 option2 thermoplastic support can not install CT

**For NW40 4000A solution and option2 thermoplastic support can not install CT

2 + 8b
Type of Left Rear connection Side 2connection
+6 Bottom dirrect
600 mm Current
1000
2 + 9 mm 21
circuit vertical 6 and 7 8bmm 2 + 7
600 connection
1000 mm transformer
600 mm 1200 mm 1000 mm
breaker busbar 9 Qty.
3a (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 - x x x 1
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 - x x x 1
NW 32
BLK110000E 12-15
Overview
Table 12-4 CT location of ACB incomer cubicle 3b + 6

1000 mm
600 mm 3b + 8a 1200 mm
1000 mm
3b + 10
Type of Left Rear connection Side connection
600 mmTop dirrect Current 1000 mm 120
600 mm
circuit vertical 6 and 7 8a connection transformer
3b (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 - x x x 1
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 - x x x 1
NW 32
4a + 6
Table 12-5 CT location of ACB incomer cubicle 1000 mm
600 mm
Type of Right Rear connection Bottom dirrect Current4a + 9
1000
circuit vertical 6 and 7 connection transformer
600 mm
4a (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 - x x 1
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 - x x 1
NW 32
12-16 BLK110000E
BlokSeT
Overview
Table 12-6 CT location of ACB incomer cubicle 4b + 6

600 mm
Type of cir- Right Rear connection Top dirrect

4b + 10 Current
600 mm
cuit breaker vertical 6 and 7 connection transformer
busbar 10 Qty.
4b (Each phase)
MTZ1 08 -16 - x x 1
NT08 -16
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08 -25 - x x 1
NW08 -25
MTZ2 32 - x x 1
NW 32
CT Metering Protection VAMP

MTZ1 x - -
- x -
- - x
MTZ2 x x -
- x x
x - x
MTZ3 x - -
- x -
- - x
*For MTZ2 40 thermoplastic support can not install CT
Wherever there is requirement of CT or PT for metering or protection purpose, it is

not possible to provide High performance where max number of CT is 1.
BLK110000E 12-17
BlokSeT Wireless Thermal monitoring
specific adaptations system
Overview
For TH110
The Wireless Thermal Monitoring system has the TH110 sensors which enable the Busbar temperature monitoring and the CL110
sensors which enable ambient or panel temperature and humidity monitoring. This data can be availed through the ZigBee enabled
gateway.
The Wireless Thermal Monitoring system solution is adapted for below

configurations:
1 - Fishplate between cubicles

2 - Customer connection
3 - HBB-VBB joints
4 - Circuit breaker terminal to connection (HBB)
5 - Circuit breaker terminal to connection (VBB)
6 - Feeder outgoing customer connections
7 - ACB upstream and downstream terminals
NOTE: Above image shows typical location of mounting the sensors. Actual location
for sensor mounting shall differ based on the type and construction of the cubicle.
12-18 BLK110000E
BlokSeT Wireless Thermal monitoring
specific adaptations system
Overview
For CL110
CL110 can be attached by magnets directly on sheet metal (example: Form 4 box)
to measure surface temperature and humidity.
To measure ambient air temperature: The plastic holder (PHA17941) is an

accessory to allow the installation of the CL110 sensor in a reverse position.
In this way the NTC probe will be directed in open air to measure the ambient
temperature.
+ =
plastic holder (PHA17941) CL110
NOTE: For more details, refer the LV Thermal Monitoring User Guide
BLK110000E 12-19
BlokSeT Thermal monitoring system
Overview
Thermal monitoring system

The permanent thermal monitoring system utilizes small plastic, non-contact and
non-powered IR sensors.
Advantages
Increased BlokSeT reliability and integrity
Via continual accurate thermal insight.
Optimise maintenance periods

The ability to move from a point in time snapshot to continual and pro-active
approach enabling better use of resources and planning.
Potential asset life extension

Due to increased lifetime thermal data and better understanding of the BlokSeT
panels integrity and health.
Arc flash mitigation (pre-control)

b Removal of human based intrusive maintenance.
b Identifies compromised joints at earliest thermal signature.
b Panels remain closed, maintaining environmental stability.
b Dielectric integrity management.
Production uptime
b Via extension / reduction in intrusive maintenance.
b Pro-active versus re-active management.
General risk mitigation

b From removal human dependant maintenance tasks in critical production
environments as it relates to both personnel and facilities.
b Fire / major inspection incidents.
b No need to open panels or go near switchgear.
Optimised / lower lifetime maintenance cost

b Human and Opex capital cost reduction.
b Remote vs. On-site - Fewer hours required.
b Quickly detect early fault warning conditions, optimising remedy planning and
costs.
Functions
The system is designed to provide continous 24 x 7 thermal monitoring detecting
the exact location of the problem BEFORE the failure, using optical sensors
installed at the heart of the sensitive areas.
12-20 BLK110000E
Overview
System features
b Integrated part of system.
Thermal Monitoring System.eps
b Suitable for new build of retrofit.

b Option of vision software with common alarm.
b Modbus protocol enables easy integration.
b Actual temp, not correlation.
b Global support.
b Vendor neutral.
b Not operator dependent.
Thermal monitoring in BlokSeT
The thermal monitoring system solution is adapted in BlokSeT for below

configurations:
Zone Configurations
1 ACB to HBB joints (connection type 1 and 2)
2 Customer incomer cable joints on busbar to ACB (connection Type – 6,7,8,9 and 10)
3 HBB and VBB joints.
4 D feeder outgoing joint (NSX100-250 side connection, NSX400-630 side connection and rear connection).
5 Fish plate joint in incomer cubicles
6 Fish plate joint in feeder cubicles
For details refer the thermal monitoring User Guide NVE92909.
BLK110000E 12-21
Overview
Recommended Positions for Sensor Installation
1 - Fishplate between cubicles

2 - Customer connection
3 - HBB-VBB joints
4 - Circuit breaker terminal to connection (HBB)
5 - Circuit breaker terminal to connection (VBB)
6 - Feeder outgoing customer connections
7 - ACB upstream and downstream terminals
NOTE: Above image shows typical location of mounting the sensors. Actual location
for sensor mounting shall differ based on the type and construction of the cubicle.
12-22 BLK110000E
BlokSeT Gulf Adaptation - In addition to
specific adaptations the Standard Offer
Compartment definition
Overview
Width (mm) X (mm) Y (mm) Z (mm)

500 500 -
700 200 500 -
800 - 800 -
2200 900 200 700 -
1000 200 800 -
200 500 400
1100
400 700 -
1200 400 800 -
Z
Y
X
X vertical busbar compartment Y device cubicle Z cable compartment

Note:
v All Dimensions are in mm.
v Hight 2200 is column hight Excluding Plinth and
Ventilation Hood.
BLK110000E 12-23
BlokSeT Option Connections
Gulf Adaptation - In addition to the
Standard Offer
Overview
1+6 1+6 1+6
Connection combination possibilities in BlokSeT
600 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm
1 +10
600 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm
Rear connection Top direct connection
6 10
Bottom horizontal
busbar
1
2+9
Rear connection 2 +Bottom
6 direct 2+5
Top horizontal busbar
600 mm 1000 mm 1200 mm

6 600 mm
2 + 7connection
1000 mm 1200 mm
9
2
3a + 6b, 3a +7b 1200 mm

1000 mm
600 mm 3a + 9
1000 mm
600 mm 1200 mm
Rear connection Bottom direct
6 connection
9
3a
3b + 6
1000 mm
600 mm 1200 mm
3b + 10
Rear connection Top direct 1000 mm
600 mm 1200 mm
6 connection
10
3b
12-24 BLK110000E
BlokSeT ComPact NS630b to 1600
specific adaptations 500mm Width Offer
Standard Offer
Overview
The cubicle
b The NS630b/800/1000/1250/1600 can be mounted in 500 mm or 700 mm size.
b It can accept PCC distribution feeders.
b When connected in vertical position:
(A) With CT - a maximum of one device can be mounted depending on
connection type and Form
(B) Without CT - a maximum of two devices can be mounted depending on
b Thermoset support can be used only for HBB, Circuit breaker connections will
be using only Thermoplastic supports.
The functional unit

b Withdrawable Devices can be mounted with through door with DRH, TOGGLE
options.
b Used as Incomers only in single front architecture (600mm & 1000 mm depth).
b Used as feeders in both single front architecture (600mm & 1000 mm depth).
b 3P, NS incomers or feeders.
b Connection to the load can be done by cables, directly from the top or from the
rear.
b Device derating values for W500 offer are same as standard NS630b-1600
derating values provided in this catalogue.

Device Horizontal Breaker Operating Breaker Busbar & Current Customer Modularity Width Right Depth Form
Mounting Busbar Position mecha- Type Customer Transformer connection mm Cubicle mm
Position Single Double nism connection (CT) access X Y Z Width
Type installation mm
possibility
NS630b - X X Through DRH/ Drawout 1 6a No Rear 12M - 500 - 1000 4
NS1600 door TOG
Vertical
X X Through DRH/ Drawout 2 6b No Rear 12M - 500 - 1000 4
door TOG
X X Through DRH/ Drawout 1 10 No Front/Rear 12M - 500 - 600 4
door TOG
X X Through DRH/ Drawout 2 9 No Front/Rear 12M+4M - 500 - 600 4
door TOG
X X Through DRH/ Drawout 3a 6b No Rear 12M 200 500 - 1000 4
door TOG
X X Through DRH/ Drawout 3b 6a No Rear 12M + 200 500 - 1000 4
door TOG 12M
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 1 Bus No - 12M + 200 500 - 600 4
door TOG cou- 12M
pler
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 2 Bus No - 12M + 200 500 - 600 4
door TOG cou- 12M
pler
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 1 6a Yes Rear 12M + - 500 - 1000 4
door TOG 12M
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 2 6b Yes Rear 12M + - 500 - 1000 4
door TOG 12M
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 1 10 Yes Front/Rear 12M + - 500 - 600 4
door TOG 12M
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 2 9 Yes Front/Rear 12M + - 500 - 600 4
door TOG 12M + 4M
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 1 Bus Yes - 12M + 200 500 - 600 4
door TOG cou- 12M +12M
pler
X - Through DRH/ Drawout 2 Bus Yes - 12M + 200 500 - 600 4
door TOG cou- 12M +12M
pler
BLK110000E 12-25
BlokSeT MasterPact MTZ1 06 to 16
specific adaptations NT06 to 16
500mm Width offer
Overview Standard Offer
The cubicle
b The MTZ1 06/08/10/12/16, NT06/08/10/12/16 can be mounted in three width
possibilities of 500 mm, or 700 mm.
b For MTZ1 06-16 and NT06-16
(A) With CT - a maximum of one device can be mounted depending on
(B) Without CT - a maximum of two devices can be mounted depending on
The functional unit

b Withdrawable Devices can be mounted and can be used as incomers or feeders.
instruments.
rear.
b Device derating values for W500 offer are same as standard MasterPact MTZ1
06 to 16 derating values provided in this catalogue.
Device Horizontal busbar Bubsbar and Current Customer Modularity Width Right cubicle Depth Form
Customer con- Transformer Connection mm width mm
nection type (CT) access mm
Single Double X Y Z SF
installation
possibility
MTZ1 X X 1 6a No Rear 12M - 500 - - 1000 4
06-16 /
X X 2 6b No Rear 12M - 500 - - 1000 4
NT06-
16 X X 1 10 No Front/Rear 12M - 500 - - 600 4
X X 2 9 No Front/Rear 12M+4M - 500 - - 600 4
X X 3a 6b No Rear 12M 200 500 - - 1000 4
X X 3b 6a No Rear 12M + 12M 200 500 - - 1000 4
X - 1 Bus No - 12M + 12M 500 - 600 4
200 -
coupler
X - 2 Bus No - 12M + 12M 500 - 600 4
200 -
coupler
X - 1 6a Yes Rear 12M + 12M - 500 - - 1000 4
X - 2 6b Yes Rear 12M + 12M - 500 - - 1000 4
X - 1 10 Yes Front/Rear 12M + 12M - 500 - - 600 4
X - 2 9 Yes Front/Rear 12M + 12M 500 - - 600 4
-
+ 4M
X - 1 Bus Yes - 12M + 12M 200 500 - 600 4
-
coupler +12M
X - 2 Bus Yes - 12M + 12M 200 500 - 600 4
-
coupler +12M
12-26 BLK110000E
BlokSeT MasterPact MTZ2 08 to 32
specific adaptations NW08 to 32
The cubicle
b The MTZ2 08/10/12/16/25/32 and NW08/10/12/16/25/32 can be mounted in four
possible widths of 700 mm, 800mm, 900 mm, 1000 mm in the D cubicle.
b It accepts a maximum of one device.
The functional unit

b Withdrawable Devices can be mounted and can be used as incomers only.
instruments.
rear.
b Device derating values for below offer are same as standard MasterPact MTZ2
08 to 32/NW08 to 32 derating values provided in this catalogue.
Device Horizontal busbar Breaker Busbar and Customer Modular- Width Right Depth Form
Type Customer con- Connec- ity - With CT mm cubicle mm
nection type tion Chamber width
access mm
MTZ2 X - - Drawout 1 6 Rear 12M+12M - 700 - 1000 - 4
08-32
NW X - - Drawout 1 6 Rear 12M+12M - 800 - 1000 - 4
08-32
X - - Drawout 1 10 Front/Rear 12M+12M+12M - 700 - 600 - 4
X - - Drawout 2 6 Rear 12M+12M - 700 - 1000 - 4
X - - Drawout 2 6 Rear 12M+12M - 800 - 1000 - 4
X - - Drawout 1 Bus Rear 12M+12M+12M 200 700 - 600 - 4
coupler
coupler
coupler
coupler
BLK110000E 12-27
BlokSeT MasterPact MTZ2 40/NW40 4000A
The cubicle
b The MTZ2 40/NW40 can be mounted in a possible width of 800 mm in the D
cubicle.
b Accepts only one device.
b Use special ventilation roof.
The functional unit

b Devices are withdrawable only, and can be used as incomers only.
instruments.
b Connection to the load can be done: by cables, directly from the top or from the
rear.
40/NW40 4000A derating values provided in this catalogue.
Device Horizontal busbar Connection type Customer Modular- Width Depth Form
Connec- ity - With CT mm mm
tion Chamber
Single Double DF Busbar Con- Customer X Y Z SF DF
access
nection Connection
MTZ2 X - 1 10 Front/Rear 10M+12M+14M - 800 - 1000 - 4
40
NW40 X - 2 9 Front/Rear 14M+12M+10M - 800 - 1000 - 4
X - - 2 6 Rear 14M+12M+10M - 800 - 1000 - 4

X - - 1 6 Rear 10M+12M+14M - 800 - 1000 - 4
X - - 1 Bus coupler Rear 10M+12M+14M 200 800 - 1000 - 4
X - - 2 Bus coupler Rear 14M+12M+10M 200 800 - 1000 - 4
12-28 BLK110000E
BlokSeT MasterPact MTZ3 40 to 63 NW40b
specific adaptations to 63
The cubicle
b The MTZ3 40/50/63/NW40b/50/63 can be mounted in a possible width of 1200
mm in the D cubicle.
b Accepts only one device.
b Is always stand alone.
The functional unit

b Devices are withdrawable, and can be used as incomers only.
instruments.
b Connection to the load can be done: by cables, directly from the top or from the
rear.
40 to 63/NW40b to 63 derating values provided in this catalogue.
Device Horizontal busbar Busbar and Customer Customer Modular- Width Depth Form
connection type Connec- ity - With CT mm mm
tion Chamber
access
MTZ3 40 / - X - 1 10 Front/Rear 9M+13M+10M - 1200 - 600 - 4
NW40b
- X - 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+9M - 1200 - 600 - 4
- X - 1 6 Rear 9M+13M+10M - 1200 - 1200 - 4
- X - 2 6 Rear 10M+13M+9M - 1200 - 1200 - 4
- X - 1 Bus coupler Rear 9M+13M+10M 400 1200 - 600 - 4
MTZ3 50 - X - 1 10 Front/Rear 9M+13M+10M - 1200 - 600 - 4
NW50/63
- X - 2 9 Front/Rear 10M+13M+9M - 1200 - 600 - 4
- X - 1 6 Rear 9M+13M+10M - 1200 - 1200 - 4
- X - 2 6 Rear 10M+13M+9M - 1200 - 1200 - 4
BLK110000E 12-29
BlokSeT Option Connections
Standard Offer
Selection
≤500V
Type of circuit Outgoing
No. of Circuit breaker position and IP Transformer (CT) front connection
breaker cables
Poles (Protection Index) installation (cost-effective
connection
possibility
solution) (1)
Through door (max IP31) NO OK

Fixed Front access
Behind door (max IP54) NO OK
NSX 100 / 160 /250
4P/3PN
Horizontal Through door (max IP31) NO OK
Rear access

Plug-in Front access
4P/3PN
Rear access
Fixed Front access Behind door (max IP54) YES OK
4P/3PN
Horizontal
NSX 250
Rear access Behind door (max IP54) YES OK
Plug-in Front access Behind door (max IP54) YES OK
4P/3PN
Horizontal
Rear access Behind door (max IP54) YES OK

Fixed Front access
4P/3PN
NSX 400 / 630

Rear access

Plug-in Front access
4P/3PN
Rear access
(1) Refer section on Accessories and cable, page 6-6.
(2) Refer section on Terminal shields, page 6-7.
(3) (4) (5) - Refer Outgoing cables connection layout and connection method, page 4-14.
12-30 BLK110000E
BlokSeT

(2) is 50 mm (see “cables layout” for
unit (mm) cost-effective)
details)
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 +
600
400
NO 12 3 4 C
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 1000
NO 1 2 3 4 C
1 4
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 +
600
400
NO 1 2 3 4 C
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 1000
NO 1 2 3 4 C
200 + 700 +
NO 12 3 4 C 600
400
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 C 200 + 700 1000
1 6
200 + 700 +
NO 1 2 3 4 C 600
400
#2 x 185 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 C 200 + 700 1000
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 +
600
400
NO 1 2 3 4 C
#2 x 300 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 1000
NO 1 2 3 4 C
1 6
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 +
600
400
NO 1 2 3 4 C
#2 x 300 mm² (5)
NO 1 2 3 4 B
200 + 500 1000
NO 1 2 3 4
BLK110000E 12-31
Notes
Technical information
Forms of switchboards 13-2

Control and communication connections 13-3
Cable connection capacity 13-4
Cable cross-section for devices 13-5
Connections in compartments and installation
on door 13-7
Copper type and cables 13-9
Heating pins/space heaters 13-10
PE-PEN bars conception and installation 13-11
BLK130010E 13-1
Technical information Forms of switchboards
Overview
Partitions inside a switchboard are described as per Annex AA of the standard

IEC61439-2.
There is a subject of agreement between the manufacturer and the user, and are
defined as 4 different forms, in order to ensure protection against direct contacts:
Form 1
No partitioning.
Form 2a
DD381678
DD381679
Functional units separated from the busbars.

Terminals for external conductors do not need to be separated from the busbars.
Form 2b
Functional units separated from the busbars.
Terminals for external conductors are separated from the busbars.
Form 2a Form 2b
Form 3a
DD381680
DD381681
Functional units separated from each other and from the busbars.
Terminals for external conductors do not need to be separated from the busbars.
Form 3b
Functional units separated from each other and from the busbars.
Terminals for external conductors are separated from the functional units, but not
Form 3a Form 3b from each other.
Form 4a
DD382369
DD382370
Functional units separated from the busbars, and from each other, including the
terminal for external conductors which are part of the functional unit.
Form 4b
Functional units separated from the busbars and from each other, including the
terminal for external conductors.
Functional units separated from the terminals for external conductors.
Form 4a Form 4b
13-2 BLK130010E
Technical information Control and communication
connections
Overview
Mw2 cubicles
Note:
1. All the Control connection to be wired to Pin Module in multiples of 12 pins. Max. 48 pin connection are possible in 1 drawer.
2. All communication connections to be routed through RJ45 connections. Refer wiring guide for more details.
BLK130020E 13-3
Technical information Customer cable connection capacity
Copper and Aluminium
Overview
D cubicle
Type of connection Cubicle dimension Device type Number of poles Cables Cu max Cable Al max
D600 MTZ1 08-16 / NT08-16 3/4P 2 x 300 mm2 2 x 300 mm2

NS800-1600
D600 MTZ2 08-16 / NW08-16 3/4P 2 x 300 mm2 2 x 300 mm2
RC
D600 + 400 MTZ1 08-16 / NT08-16 3/4P 3 x 300 mm 2
3 x 300 mm2
NS800-1600
D600 + 400 MTZ2 08-25 / NW08-25 3/4P 3 x 300 mm2 3 x 300 mm2
W700 + 400 MTZ1 08-16 / NT08-16 3/4P 2 x 300 mm2 2 x 300 mm2
NS800-1600
MTZ2 08-25 / NW08-25 3/4P 2 x 300 mm2 2 x 300 mm2
SC
W700 + 400 MTZ2 32 / NW32 3/4P 4 x 300 mm 2
4 x 300 mm2
MTZ2 32 / NW32 3/4P 5 x 300 mm 2
5 x 300 mm2
D600 MTZ1 08-16 / NT08-16 3/4P 3 x 300 mm2 3 x 300 mm2

NS800-1600
MTZ2 08-25 / NW08-25 3/4P 3 x 300 mm2 3 x 300 mm2
MTZ2 32 / NW32 3/4P 5 x 300 mm 2
5 x 300 mm2
TDC/BDC
MTZ2 40 / NW40 3/4P 6 x 300 mm 2
6 x 300 mm2
MTZ3 40-63 / NW40b-63 3/4P 6 x 300 mm2 6 x 300 mm2
D600 + 400 MTZ3 40-63 / NW40b-63 3/4P 6 x 300 mm 2
6 x 300 mm2
RC: Rear connection

SC: Side connection
TDC: Top direct connection
BDC: Bottom direct connection
13-4 BLK130021E
Technical information Cable cross-section for devices
Overview
Power Control Centre (PCC)
Ue = 415 V
Type of circuit breaker Rating (A) Cable size
iC60 25 10 mm²
NG125 32 10 mm²
63 16 mm²
80 25 mm²
125 35 mm²
NSX100/NSXm100 16 10 mm²
25 10 mm²
32 10 mm²
40 10 mm²
50 16 mm²
63 16 mm²
80 25 mm²
100 35 mm²
NSX160/NSXm160 32 10 mm²
40 10 mm²
50 16 mm²
63 16 mm²
80 25 mm²
100 35 mm²
125 50 mm²
160 70 mm²
NSX250 63 16 mm²
80 25 mm²
100 35 mm²
125 Bar
160 Bar
200 Bar
250 Bar
NSX400 400 Bar
NSX630 630 Bar
BLK130021E 13-5
Technical information Cable cross-section for devices
Overview
Motor Control Central (MCC)
With TeSys U
Base Protection module Cable size
LUB12 LUC_1X 2.5 mm²
LUC_05 2.5 mm²
LUC_12 4.0 mm²
LUB32 LUC_18 6.0 mm²
LUC_32 6.0 mm²
With GV2, GV3, GV4, NS and NSX
Contactor Cable size

incoming outgoing
LC1D09 2.5 mm² 2.5 mm²
LC1D18 4.0 mm² 4.0 mm²
LC1D25 6.0 mm² 6.0 mm²
LC1D32(1) 2x6.0 mm² 2x6.0 mm²
LC1D38 2x6.0 mm² 2x6.0 mm²
LC1D40 16.0 mm² 16.0 mm²
LC1D40A 16.0 mm² 16.0 mm²
LC1D50 25.0 mm² 25.0 mm²
LC1D50A 25.0 mm² 25.0 mm²
LC1D65 25.0 mm² 25.0 mm²
LC1D65A 25.0 mm² 25.0 mm²
LC1D80 25.0 mm² 25.0 mm²
LC1D115(2) Bar 35.0 mm²
LC1D150 Bar 50.0 mm²
LC1F185 Bar Bar
LC1F225 Bar Bar
LC1F265 Bar Bar
LC1F330 Bar Bar
LC1F400 Bar Bar
LC1F500 Bar Bar
LC1G150 Bar Bar
LC1G185 Bar Bar
LC1G225 Bar Bar
LC1G265 Bar Bar
LC1G330 Bar Bar
LC1G400 Bar Bar
LC1G500 Bar Bar
(1) 15 kW in 2M-Half - cables 2x6.0 mm²

(2) 55 kW in 690 V - cable - 25 mm2
13-6 BLK130021E
Technical information Connections in compartments
and installation on door
Overview
The choice of the cable compartment size depends on:

b the functional unit dimensions (electrical and mechanical),
b the cable bending radius (defined by the cable),
b the form box dimension (defined by the type of functional unit).
Functional unit Cable

dimensions characteristics
Form box Cable bending

dimension radius
Cable compartment
dimension
Remaining
space for
the cables
Form box
Functional unit
Cable compartment
Side compartment Mw2 remaining space for cables
Functional unit Cable Compartment width

Specificity
height 300 mm 400 mm
C100H, C100F 189 mm 289 mm PCC - MCC
C200H, C200F 189 mm 289 mm PCC - MCC
C200F - 208 mm PCC 4P
189 mm - PCC - MCC
254 mm PCC 3P - MCC
C300F
- 208 mm PCC 4P
203 mm PCC 3P - MCC
236 mm PCC - MCC
C400F -
208 mm PCC - MCC
C500F 236 mm PCC - MCC
C600F 236 mm PCC - MCC
For cable compartment 200 mm width (W800 mm cubicle), no form 4 box is

expected. All the space is dedicated to the cables.
There is no size constraint for the curve radius of the cables.
BLK130021E 13-7
Technical information Connections in compartments
and installation on door
Overview
Cable compartment (D, Mf)

Lateral compartment width
A
200 mm 84 mm
DD405420
400 mm 184 mm
b A: distance between the cable tie bar and the Form 4 box.
b compartments of 400 mm widths are recommended in order to make the cable entry into the
Form 4 boxes easier.
13-8 BLK130021E
Technical information Copper type and cables
Overview
Copper type to use b Use exclusively Cu-ETP complying with the following specification:
Standard Designation
Raw material designation
EN 1652 Cu ETP R250
Standard international equivalent
ISO 1634 Cu ETP HB
Cables and copper bars specifications

b Cables :
v cables(*) with 750/1000 V insulation and temperature rating 105 °C can be used.
(*) All cables must be RoHS and REACH certified. Schneider Electric recommends the use of
PVC cables of type 10V2-K and Tri-Rated wire.
BLK130021E 13-9
Technical information Heating pins/space heaters
Overview
Heat and humidity management
Principle:
High humidity and quick temperature changes (example: day/night) in electrical rooms often as
they generate condensation on metallic and plastic surfaces. This condensation is very
dangerous when left on insulation materials, as it increases the risk of current leakage.
Ultimately, it can generate short circuits or internal arcs.
To ensure BlokSeT works within the high room humidity and quick temperature changes, it is
often necessary to maintain the temperature inside the cubicle above the dew point (Tr: water
vapor condensation temperature) when switchboard is shut down (maintenance, normal stop,
etc.). In order to perform this, cubicle heating (using space heaters) is necessary.
Note: This calculation must be done whenever changes in temperatue and humditiy are noticed.
If calculation sheet mentions a space heater is necessary, then this device must be installed.
Installation: for installation give ref to ass guide
Space heaters installed in BlokSeT must fulfill the safety requirements of

IEC61439-1/2, which BlokSeT is complaint with:
b parts with possible hand touching < 70°C
b IP2X minimum on live parts
For more details, refer chapter " 5.08. BlokSeT - Heating resistor calculation", in the technical
transfer file.
13-10 BLK130021E
Technical information PE-PEN bars conception and
installation
Overview
No. of
Neutral System Neutral Cubicles
No. of Wires
Poles
PE-PEN Configuration
Device
TN-C
TN-S
Mw2
VBB
Distributed Switched
Ms
TT
Dc
Mf
IT
D
DD405382
■ ■ ■ - ■ - - 4P 5 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DD405384
- - ■ ■ - - 3P 5 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
b N laid out through V-BB and FUs (link in FU)

b IEC 60364
DD405387
■ ■ ■ - - - 3P 4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DD405383
- - - ■ - - - 3P 4 ■ - - - -
b horizontal PEN replaces Neutral

b PE laid out through the V-BB and FUs (link in FU)
(1): single PEN/PE link for the whole switchboard, on the incomer
BLK130021E 13-11
Technical information PE-PEN bars conception and
installation
Overview
No. of
Neutral System Neutral Cubicles
Poles
No. of Wires
PE-PEN Configuration
Device
TN-C
TN-S
Mw2
VBB
Distributed Switched
Ms
TT
Dc
Mf
IT
D
DD405386
- - - ■ - - - 3P 4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
b horizontal PEN replaces Neutral

b PE runs horizontally for earthing of the columns (no vertical PE)
b PEN is distributed in the connection compartment: uninsulated bar
(1): single PEN/PE link for the whole switchboard, on the incomer
TN-C / TN-S
DD405388
b TN-C/TN-S mixing possible in the switchboard, not in the column

b the horizontal PEN replaces Neutral (H-BB in TN-C)
b PE runs horizontally for earthing of the columns and vertical PE connection
(TN-S)
b PEN/PE link on each incomer (TN-C)
b TN-C scheme is not permitted downstream of TN-S system in the switchboard.
13-12 BLK130021E
Notes
se.com
Schneider Electric Industries SAS As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time,
35, rue Joseph Monier - CS 30323 please ask for confirmation of the information given in this document.
F92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex
This document has been printed on ecological paper.
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Design : Schneider Electric

Capital social 896 313 776 € Photos : Schneider Electric
www.se.com Printing :
07-2023
© 2023 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. Life Is On Schneider Electric is a trademark and the property of Schneider Electric SE, its subsidiaries and affiliated companies.
• JYT1653300_O

4.1 BlokSeT Evo Catalogue - Optimum - JYT1653300

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4.1 BlokSeT Evo Catalogue - Optimum - JYT1653300

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BlokSeT

Low voltage switchboard

Description and characteristics 2-1

Power Control Center

Power Control Center

Power Control Center 5-1

Power Control Center

Motor Control Center 7-1

BlokSeT IPMCC 8-1

Variable speed drives and soft starters 9-1

BlokSeT specific adaptations 12-1

Technical information 13-1

My Personalized Experience 1-33

EcoStruxure Power Build 1-35

Technical transfer file 1-37

Withdrawability of functional units 1-43

Very high power incomer / feeder 1-44

High power incomer / feeder 1-45

High power incomer / feeder 1-50

Variable speed drive

Power factor correction and harmonic filtering 1-53

Power factor correction 1-55

Double Front Solution 1-56

Enhanced safety and Greater reliability,

Type-tested for high

With BlokSeT, protection

Tested and certified by

Test position Disconnected position

Schneider Electric inside:

Durability in difficult environments

Airport Data centres

Healthcare facilities Commercial buildings

Outstanding safety and customized solu-

A disconnectable design for power

A flexible, withdrawable design for motor

Upgrade BlokSeT while under load with high level of safety

24/7 visibility of energy use and power quality

Drawer size optimization Direct connection to the vertical busbar (IPxxD)

Schneider Electric devices inside

Greater efficiency and enhanced productivity

Optimize motor performance

Enhance control and monitoring

Boost smart-grid integration

Greater reliability, superior efficiency,

For power distribution and motor control including variable speed

Variable speed drives and soft starters

(1) PCC = Power Control Centre

Green Premium TM equipment

The BlokSeT is RoHS and REACh compliant

Upgradeability & Recyclability

water and wastewater treatment, food & beverage,

pharmaceuticals, microelectronics, airports...

Our iPMCC solutions adapt to the specific requirements

of your continuous and critical process.

Improve the dependability

you achieve your goal.

...manage lead times and

commitments to sustainable development and environmental protection.

your electricity consumption costs per motor application.

> iPMCC solutions can integrate a dedicated human-

3 Information for site engineering

the safety and dependability of your installations throughout their lifecycle.

Provide safe and dependable

Green Premium TM equipment